Sie sind auf Seite 1von 358

R

OWNER’S HANDBOOK

Publication Part No. LRL 18 02 54 701


L

About this handbook


This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your new vehicle. Right hand drive
and left hand drive conditions may be shown in the graphics and where information is specific to a
particular country, it is indicated as such.
The Quick Start section is designed to rapidly familiarise the driver with the initial set up and also
explain some of the unique features. Please take the time to study the operating instructions with
your vehicle as soon as you can.

Important
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment.
Some of the options may not be fitted to your vehicle, unless they formed part of the original vehicle
specification. Therefore, some parts of this handbook may not apply to your vehicle. Furthermore,
due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of options before they become generally available.
The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Vehicle design
changes may have been made after this handbook was printed. When this occurs, a handbook
supplement is added to the literature pack. Subsequent updates can be viewed on the Land Rover
internet site at; www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,
may not be reproduced, not translated, without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted. All
rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or other means, without
prior written permission from Land Rover Customer Services.

© Land Rover 2006


All rights reserved.
Published by Land Rover Technical Communications.

2
R

Handbook Contents
Quick Start Driving and Operating
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Starting and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gas Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Fuel and Refuelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Park Distance Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
General Information Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Transfer Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . 167
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Controls and Instruments
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control . . 179
Keys and Remote Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Locks and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Supplementary Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 72
Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Door Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Load Carrying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Front Lighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Settings Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Maintenance
Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Audible Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Under-hood Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Lamps and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Engine Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Electric Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Heating and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Interior Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Loadspace Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
In-Car Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System. . . . . . . 246
Land Rover Homelink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cleaning and Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Identification Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

3
L

Handbook Contents
Roadside Emergency
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Technical Data
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Care of Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Controls and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Auxiliary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Audio Voice Recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Radio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
CD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Rear Seat Entertainment Commands . . . . 346

4
R

Quick Start
Quick Start
THE REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
CENTRAL LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
SEAT ADJUSTMENT - POWER SEATS . . . .10
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . .10
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT . . . . . .11
PARKBRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . .12
SEAT BELTS/CHILD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . .13
PASSENGER AIR BAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
HEATING AND VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . .14
FACIA CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
FACIA CONTROLS KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
WARNING INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
STEERING COLUMN LEVERS . . . . . . . . . . .20
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .21
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
REAR VIEW MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . .24
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) . . . . . . . .25
TRANSFER GEARBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
TERRAIN RESPONSE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .26
AIR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . .28
RADIO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
CD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Gas Station Information


FUEL FILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

5
L

6
R

Quick Start
THE REMOTE CONTROL
Quick Start

Single point entry


This is a security feature that unlocks only the
driver’s door. It can be disabled on individual
remote controls by simultaneously pressing
1 and holding buttons 2 and 3 for three
seconds. The vehicle will lock and then
unlock in the currently selected mode to
2 confirm the change.
You can now unlock all doors with a single
3 press. Repeating the procedure will re-enable
Single point entry.
4
Automatic relock
LAN0114G
If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
1. Key release button. control, it will automatically relock and arm the
Press to release the folded key. alarm if a door or the tailgate is not opened
2. Lock button. within one minute.
Locks all doors and activates perimetric
alarm. Partial arming
See Perimetric alarm, 47. If an aperture (door, hood or tailgate) is not
3. Unlock button. fully closed when the remote control lock
Press once to disarm all alarm features and button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly
unlock driver’s door only. Press twice to to signal that an aperture is still open. The
open all doors. alarm will remain disarmed and all of the
closed apertures will lock.
Note: The above applies unless configured
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
for multi-point entry.
system will automatically arm, signalled by
See Single-point entry, 44.
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps.
4. Land Rover button.
The remote control can be programmed to
initiate one of 5 features; Panic alarm,
Headlamp courtesy delay, Tailgate release,
Tailglass release or Air suspension control.
See LAND ROVER BUTTON, 42.

7
L

Quick Start
CENTRAL LOCKING EMERGENCY UNLOCKING

1 3 2

LAN0121N

Master lock and unlock switches


1. Press to unlock all doors and tailgate.
2. Press to lock all doors and tailgate.
3. Press both buttons simultaneously for
three seconds to release the tailgate.
Speed related locking
If enabled, the doors and tailgate will
automatically lock when the vehicle’s speed
exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph).
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
SETTINGS menu of the trip computer.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 86.
LAN0116G

If the remote control should fail, there is an


emergency access feature on the left-hand front
door lock. With the key inserted into the slot
beneath the handle cap, the cap can be pulled
outwards slightly and then moved backwards to
unhook it. The key can now be used to unlock
the vehicle.
See Emergency locking/unlocking, 50.

8
R

Quick Start
TAILGATE HOOD

3
2

LAN0394G
LAN0395G

Opening the tailgate


With all the doors unlocked, press the release Opening
button 1 on the tailgate to release. Pull the hood release lever 1 located on the
The tailgate incorporates a ‘Power closure’ left-hand side of the vehicle.
feature, which removes the need to ‘slam’ the Lift the hood safety catch lever 2, located on the
tailgate when closing. front edge of the hood beneath the center point
of the words LAND ROVER and raise the hood.
Opening the tailglass
With all the doors unlocked, press the touch Closing
pad 2 on the exterior handle and pull to open. Lower the hood until it is 300 mm (12 inches)
from its closed position. Using the palms of
both hands positioned on the front edge of the
Operating note
hood on either side of the radiator grille, push
If the vehicle is locked/unlocked 10 times
within a short period, the door and tailgate down until the catches ‘click’.
latches will be disabled for approximately one Check that both catches 3 are engaged by trying
minute, to protect the battery and lock to lift the front edge of the hood.
mechanism.

9
L

Quick Start
SEAT ADJUSTMENT - POWER SEATS DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
(Driver’s seat only)
2 1
3

LAN0397G

Once you have adjusted the driver’s seat and


exterior mirrors, the vehicle can memorise
1 2 these settings for future use.
1. Press the memory store button 1 to
activate the memory function for five
seconds.
2. Press one of the preset buttons 2 within
LAN0396G
five seconds to memorise the current
To adjust the seats, the starter switch must be settings. MEMORY STORED will be
in position I or II. displayed in the message center
accompanied by an audible chime to
1. Seat recline.
confirm the settings have been memorised.
2. Seat fore/aft, cushion height and front tilt
To recall a stored driving position, press the
control.
appropriate preset button 2.
3. Lower backrest lumbar support.
Power operated memory driver’s seat also has Operating note
a 10 minute active period (Non-memory power A seat position will only be memorised during
operated seats up to 15 minutes) initiated the five second active period.
when: Any existing settings will be over-written
• The driver’s door is opened/closed. when programming a memory position.
• The starter key is turned to the off position.
See FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT, 55. Lazy entry
When this feature is enabled, the vehicle stores
the seating and mirror positions for each
remote control. Next time the vehicle is
unlocked using a remote control, the position of
the seat and mirrors will adjust to the last used
position.
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
Settings option accessed via the trip computer.

10
R

Quick Start
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT PARKBRAKE (EPB)
Applying

LAN0406G

With the vehicle stationary, pull up the


parkbrake lever and release it. The lever will
return to a neutral position and the red warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate.
Releasing

LAN0398G

1. Move the lever located under the steering


wheel fully downward.
LAN0407G
2. Adjust the height and reach of the steering
wheel to the desired position. The starter switch must be in position I or II.
Apply the footbrake and press down on the
3. Move the lever fully up to lock the position
parkbrake lever.
of the wheel.
If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake
See STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT, 80.
applied and either D (Drive) or R (Reverse)
selected, pressing the accelerator will
automatically release the parkbrake.
For more detailed information on the parkbrake,
see PARKBRAKE (EPB), 177.

11
L

Quick Start
WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS Door mirror adjustment
To adjust the mirrors, rotate the mirror
adjustment knob 1 left or right to select the
1 appropriate mirror. Move the knob in any
direction to adjust the position of the mirror
glass. See EXTERIOR MIRRORS, 81.
Reverse automatic mirror dip
With the feature enabled, when reverse gear is
selected the door mirrors will dip.
The dip position of the door mirrors can be
personalised. See Reverse mirror dipping, 82.
2
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
LAN0399G
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 86.
Windows
• To open a window, press and hold the
respective switch.
• To close the window, pull and hold the
switch.
Window movement can be stopped at any time
by releasing the switch.
See ELECTRIC WINDOWS, 115.
One touch operation (front doors only)
Press/lift the switch briefly to open or close the
window in one movement. Window movement
can be stopped at any time by pressing the
switch again.
Rear window isolation switch
Press the right-hand side of switch 2 to inhibit
the operation of the rear window switches.

Resonance with lowered windows


If a resonance/booming sound occurs when a
rear window is open, lowering an adjacent
front window about 25 mm (1 inch) will
eliminate the condition.

12
R

Quick Start
SEAT BELTS/CHILD RESTRAINTS PASSENGER AIR BAG
A warning indicator in the
instrument pack will illuminate to
alert you that the driver’s and/or
PASS
front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled. An AIRBAG
intermittent chime may also be heard. OFF

Automatic Locking Reels (ALR)


All passenger seat belts have ALR fitted for use
with child seats or securing large items.
• To engage: extend seat belt to maximum
length to enable locking mechanism. PASS
AIRBAG
OFF


1 2 3

Allow seat belt to retract onto the child 4


GHI

7
ABC

5
JKL

8
DEF

6
MNO

9
6CD-465

PQRS TUV WXYZ

seat/large item (a clicking sound will be LAN0759N


0

heard as the belt retracts). Ensure there is


no slack by pressing the seat/item firmly The front passenger seat is fitted with an
into the vehicle seat. occupancy detection system that determines
• To disengage: unbuckle belt and allow belt the state of seat occupancy and sets the air bag
to fully retract. status to suit.
• Seat unoccupied - air bag deactivated and
indicator off.
With ALR enabled, as the seat belt retracts, it
will automatically lock, preventing • Seat occupied - air bag activated and
re-extension. indicator off.
Ensure passengers do not fully extend the • Seat occupied by a child seat or low weight
restraints and inadvertently engage this object - air bag deactivated and indicator
feature during normal use. on.
See Occupant detection, 77.
Child Seats
It is important to remember that the child’s Operating note
weight, rather than age, determines the type of If the indicator becomes permanently
seat that is required. illuminated when the seat is definitely empty,
See CHILD SEATS, 67. please contact your Land Rover Dealer
immediately.
Recommended child seat
Land Rover strongly recommends the use of
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) child seats.
LATCH child seats can only be fitted in the
rear, outer seating positions.

13
L

Quick Start
HEATING AND VENTILATION

1 1

ECON

LAN0762N

AUTO (Automatic) MODE Air conditioning is automatically switched on


Press AUTO to select automatic and controlled whenever the system is not
operation of the system, both operating in ‘Economy’ mode.
LEDs in the switch will illuminate.
The system adjusts heat output, blower speed, External water deposits
air intake and airflow distribution to maintain The air conditioning system removes
your the selected temperature(s) and reduce moisture from the air and deposits excess
misting without further adjustments. water beneath the vehicle. Puddles may form,
Use the air distribution and blower controls to but this is normal and no cause for concern.
adjust the automatic settings. The appropriate
LED in the AUTO control will extinguish. Temperature selection
Rotate the controls 1 to adjust the temperature
Recommended mode for the respective side of the passenger
Select AUTO as the normal operating mode. compartment.
This will help prevent window misting and
odours from the climate control system. Operating note
It is not possible to achieve a temperature
Air conditioning differential of more than 4°C (7°F) between
Air conditioning provides cooled and left and right.
dehumidified air for occupant comfort. Dry
airflow is effective in preventing misting of
windows and is also beneficial at low external
temperatures.

14
R

Quick Start
Blower speed Seat heaters
Rotate the control 2 to adjust the airflow. LEDs Press the relevant button to
will illuminate to indicate which of the eight operate the required seat heater at
possible speeds is currently selected. high level. Both LEDs in the switch
will illuminate.
Air distribution control
Press a second time to heat the seat at a lower
Press to select a distribution setting. An LED
level. One LED will extinguish.
will illuminate in the switch.
Press a third time to switch off.
Windshield and side window vents
Defrost mode
Face level vents Press to remove frost or heavy
misting from the windshield. The
system will automatically adjust
Foot level vents the blower output for maximum
clearing, in addition the rear window and
windshield heaters will be activated.

More than one setting can be selected. Press again to switch off defrost mode. The rear
window and windshield heaters will remain on
Air recirculation for a preset interval.
Press to activate air recirculation.
Heated windshield/rear window
An LED will illuminate in the
switch. Press again to return to Press to operate. An LED will
fresh air intake. illuminate in the switch.

OFF The heaters will automatically


switch off after a preset interval.
Press to switch the system off. An
LED will illuminate in the switch.
Press again to return the system to For more information, see TEMPERATURE
its previous operating mode. The system will CONTROLS, 119.
also be reactivated by using the AUTO, blower
speed, air distribution or defrost controls.
Economy mode
Press to select ‘Economy’ mode.
An LED will illuminate in the
switch.
Air conditioning is switched off to reduce load
on the engine and improve fuel consumption.

15
L

Quick Start
FACIA CONTROLS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

27 26 25 24 16
17
AUTO

23

28 22
21 19 18

20
LAN0111N

16
R

Quick Start
FACIA CONTROLS KEY 14. Audio display/controls
1. Lamps master switch 15. Passenger air bag status indicator
2. High beam/Direction indicators/Trip 16. Heater/Air conditioning controls
computer 17. Gear selector
3. Cruise control switches 18. Display screen
4. Tachometer 19. Transfer gearbox switch
5. Temperature gauge 20. Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch
6. Horn buttons 21. Air suspension switch
7. Fuel gauge 22. Terrain ResponseTM control switch
8. Speedometer 23. Electric parkbrake (EPB) switch
9. Audio/Telephone remote controls 24. Starter switch
10. Wiper/washer controls 25. Telephone switch
11. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) switch 26. Steering column adjustment
12. Hazard warning lamp switch 27. Voice recognition switch
13. Door lock/unlock switches 28. Dimmer control

17
L

Quick Start
WARNING INDICATORS Seat belts - RED.
Battery charging - RED.
Low gear range selected - GREEN.
Low oil pressure - RED.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) on -
Parkbrake - RED (Canada only). GREEN.

Parkbrake - RED (U.S. only). Cruise control active - AMBER.

Brakes - RED/AMBER Direction indicator - GREEN.


(Canada only).
Trailer direction indicator -
Brakes - RED/AMBER (U.S.only). GREEN.

Anti-lock braking system - AMBER. Side lamps/Headlamps on -


GREEN.

Air bag - RED.


Headlamp high beam on - BLUE.

Engine - AMBER.
Rear fog lamps on - AMBER.

Suspension/Dynamic response -
RED/AMBER. Front fog lamps on - GREEN.

Low tire pressure - AMBER.


If a red warning indicator illuminates while
driving, a serious fault is indicated. Stop the
vehicle and refer to the main section of this
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) - handbook.
AMBER. For a full description of warning indicators and
their functions, see Warning Indicators, 100.
Adaptive front lighting system -
AMBER.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -


AMBER.

18
R

Quick Start
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH Headlamp courtesy delay
With the master switch in positions 2, 3 or 4,
4 turn the starter switch off and remove the key.
3 Turn the master switch to the off position. The
1 2
headlamps will remain on for up to 240
seconds. For a full description of this feature
and how to set the time delay, see Headlamp
AUTO
courtesy delay, 43.

5
6

LAN0403G

1. Side lamps and headlamps off.


2. Side lamps on.
3. Low beam headlamps on.
4. Automatic control lamps on.
In AUTO mode and the starter switch in
position II, a sensor monitors the exterior
light levels and will automatically switch
the side lamps and low beam headlamps
on or off as required.
5. Front fog lamps on.
6. Front and rear fog lamps on.

Fog lamps cannot be operated if the lamps


master switch is at position 4 Auto.

For a full description of these functions, see


EXTERIOR LAMPS, 107.

19
L

Quick Start
STEERING COLUMN LEVERS Direction/turn indicators/Headlamp high
beam

7
LAN0519G

1. Rain sensor variable delay wipe.


2. Normal speed wipe. LAN0405G
3. Fast speed wipe.
Move the lever up or down to
4. Single wipe. activate the direction/turn
5. Rotate collar to adjust rain sensor variable indicators.
delay.
Rear wiper and washer Push the lever away from you to
Pull the lever to position 6 for intermittent select headlamp high beam. A
operation of the rear wiper. Pull and hold the blue warning indicator will
lever in position 7 to operate the rear washer illuminate on the instument pack.
and wiper. Trip computer
Windshield washer Press the button on the end of the
Push the button on the end of the lever to cycle through the trip
lever to operate the wndscreen computer functions displayed on
washer. the message center.
See TRIP COMPUTER -
For more detailed information on the wash/wipe
FUNCTION SELECTION, 85
system, see WINDSHIELD WIPERS, 110.

20
R

Quick Start
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES
Settings options (trip computer)
These are displayed on the main message center. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 86.

SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
oC or oF
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING Off
(Set a personal speed limit - Warnings are 20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
displayed in the message center) (units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO

Remote control Daytime running lamps


The remote control can be configured to Unless prevented by legislation, it is possible to
operate the following features: automatically switch on the exterior lamps
• Panic alarm, for personal protection. See whenever the engine is running. See Daytime
Panic alarm, 43. running lamps, 108.
• Headlamp courtesy delay, providing Speed dependent wiper mode
lighting for personal safety. See Headlamp The wiper speed in all modes can be
courtesy delay, 43. automatically varied according to vehicle
• Air suspension control, allows remote speed. See Speed-dependent mode, 111.
operation of the air suspension. See Air
suspension control, 44.
• Tailgate release function, releases the
tailgate as a whole. See Tailgate release,
45.
• Tailglass release function, releases only the
tailglass. See Tailglass release, 45.
• Single point entry, allowing only the drivers
door to be opened remotely. See
Single-point entry, 44.

21
L

Quick Start
OVERHEAD CONSOLE Sunroof
Open/close sunroof:
• Press and release the switch 1 to open the
sunroof fully.
1 • Press the switch 2 to close.
Tilt sunroof:
• Press and release the switch 2 to open the
sunroof to the tilt position.
• Press and hold the switch 1 to close.
2 If the sunroof is moving, it can be stopped by
LAN0401G
pressing the swich again.
See SUNROOF OPERATION, 117.
Courtesy lamps
If automatic mode is enabled, the front and rear
courtesy lamps will operate in conjunction with Operating note
the vehicle being unlocked/locked or when a The sunroof can be operated with the starter
door is opened. key in position I or II and for 40 seconds after
position 0 has been selected, providing that
neither front door has been opened.
Automatic mode With the starter key in position I or 0, the
Automatic mode for the courtesy lamps can switch will need to be pressed and held until
be enabled/disabled by pressing and holding the roof reaches the desired position.
the center lamp switch for more than three
seconds.
A message will be displayed in the message
center advising you of the mode currently set.

The courtesy lamps can be manually switched


on/off by pressing and releasing the center
lamp switch (arrowed in illustration).
See Front interior lamps, 127.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps can be switched on/off by
pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp.

22
R

Quick Start
REAR VIEW MIRROR HOMELINK® TRANSMITTER
Automatic dimming

LAN0231G

Rear view mirrors are fitted with a feature that


will automatically darken to counteract glare
from the headlamps of a following vehicle.
This feature is temporarily switched off while
reverse gear is selected.
See REAR-VIEW MIRROR, 133. 1

2
H6480N

1. Status indicator light


Red - transmitter
Green - auto dimming
2. Channel buttons
The buttons 2 can be programmed to transmit
radio frequencies that can operate external
devices i.e. garage doors, entry gates, security
systems etc.
See HOMELINK® TRANSMITTER, 140.

23
L

Quick Start
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CommandShift
CommandShift gear selection can be used as
Gearshift interlock
an alternative to automatic gear selection and is
The starter switch must be in position II, the particularly effective when rapid acceleration or
foot brake applied and the selector release engine braking is required.
button pressed before the gear selector can be
moved from P (Park) to R (Reverse).
The gear selector must be in P before the starter
key can be removed.
See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USE, 157.
Sport mode

LAN0422G

1. Select Sport mode. The transmission will


automatically select the gear most
appropriate to the vehicle’s road speed and
LAN0408G
accelerator position.
In Sport mode, automatic gear changing is 2. Moving the selector lever forward (+) or
maintained but the gearshift changes are backward (-) and then releasing will
modified to improve performance. manually select a higher or lower gear
To select Sport mode, move the gear selector (when available). The message
from D towards the left-hand side of the vehicle. TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT
The word SPORT will appear in the instrument SELECTED will appear in the message
pack display and the LED in the gear selector center.
surround will illuminate. 3. Subsequent gear selections will shown in
the instrument pack display.
With the gear selector in Sport, the 4. To deselect CommandShift mode, move
transmission will stay in lower gears for the selector lever back to D.
longer with downshifts occurring more
readily.
Fuel consumption will be adversely affected.
When using Terrain Response, Sport mode is
only available if the General program is
selected.

24
R

Quick Start
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) TRANSFER GEARBOX

LAN0263G LAN0424G

HDC operates in conjunction with the anti-lock 1. HIGH range should be used for all normal
braking system to provide greater control in road driving and also for off-road driving
off-road situations, particularly when across dry level terrain.
descending severe gradients.
2. LOW range should be used in situations
Press the switch (arrowed in where low speed manoeuvring is
illustration) to select HDC. HDC necessary, or in extreme off-road
can be selected at speeds below conditions.
80 km/h (50 mph), but will not be fully active
until the vehicle speed reduces below 50 km/h Range changing
(30 mph), confirmed by a continuously The recommended method for range changing
illuminated HDC indicator in the instrument is with the vehicle stationary. With the engine
pack. running and the main gearbox in N (Neutral),
Press the switch again to deselect HDC. press and release the front/rear of the transfer
gearbox switch to select the range required.
See HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC), 181. The indicators on the switch and instrument
pack display will flash during range changing.
When range changing is complete, a chime will
sound and a message displayed in the message
center.
See TRANSFER GEARBOX, 162.

25
L

Quick Start
TERRAIN RESPONSE SYSTEM The Terrain Response system is always active
and cannot be switched off. When the vehicle is
started, the system will normally start in its
1 2 3 4 5 General program.
To raise the rotary knob, press down lightly and
release. Manual selection of a special program,
by rotating the knob, will provide benefits in
how the vehicle can be driven over different
surfaces or terrains by automatically adjusting
the vehicle’s drive and suspension systems.
It is recommended that a special program be
engaged whenever driving conditions could
become difficult and cancelled once the
conditions for use are no longer present. To
LAN0426G
lower the rotary knob press down until a ‘click’
1. General: Suitable for surfaces that match is heard.
typical road surfaces.
2. Grass-Gravel-Snow: Suitable for surfaces Wading
which are firm, but have a slippery surface, When driving through water less than 490
e.g. grass, snow, loose gravel, pebbles or mm (19 inches) deep, select the program
icy conditions. suitable for the surface beneath the water.
3. Mud-Ruts: Suitable for soft, muddy,
uneven or deeply rutted ground. It is
recommended that LOW range is selected
on the Transfer gearbox.
4. Sand: Suitable for soft, predominantly dry,
yielding sandy ground, e.g. sand dunes and
deserts. If the sand is damp or wet, the
Mud-Ruts program may be more
beneficial.
5. Rock Crawl: Only selectable when the
Transfer gearbox is in LOW range. Suitable
for crossing wet or dry, solid unyielding
ground requiring high levels of wheel
displacement, e.g. clusters of boulders or
rocky river beds.
See TERRAIN RESPONSE, 191.

26
R

Quick Start
AIR SUSPENSION See AIR SUSPENSION, 184.

CRUISE CONTROL
2
Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a
constant road speed without using the
3 accelerator pedal.
4
1
5 4
3
6
2
1
LAN0271G 7
Vehicle height can be manually adjusted via the
raise/lower switch 1. Height changes may only LAN0252G

be made when the the engine is running and the


1. CANCEL: cancel cruise control, but retains
driver and passenger doors are closed.
the set speed in memory.
Indicators 2 or 7 will illuminate to show the
2. RESUME: resumes a SET speed retained in
direction of movement. They extinguish when
memory.
the height change is complete.
3. SET - : to set a road speed or decrease the
Off-road height 3, provides improved ground
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when cruise
clearance and approach, departure and
control is operating.
break-over angles.
4. SET + : to set a road speed or increase the
On-road height 4, is the normal height for the
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when cruise
vehicle.
control is operating.
Access height 5, lowers the vehicle to provide
easier entry, exit and loading of the vehicle. This
Cruise control will automatically disengage
position may be selected up to 40 seconds after
when the brake pedal is used or when the
the starter switch is turned off.
vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h (18 mph).
Crawl (locked at Access height) 6, allows the
vehicle to be driven at low speeds at access
See CRUISE CONTROL, 165.
height, to give increased roof clearance.

Vehicle height will be automatically adjusted


according to road speed in order to maintain
driveability and handling.
If Terrain Response is fitted, some of its
programs will automatically adjust the
suspension height.

27
L

Quick Start
AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION Switching on the audio unit

Steering wheel controls

FM 14 : 54
2 107.9 KSAN FM
1 2 3 4 5 6

2
3 ICE1911 NAS

4 To turn on the audio unit, press the rotary


control.
5
To make any of the changes to settings, as
shown in the following pages, the unit must be
switched on.
Volume control

Audio Volume
16
ICE1579 ENG
1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Mode select
2. Volume up
3. Volume down
4. Channel up
ICE1615
ICE 1615ENG
5. Channel down
To increase or decrease the volume level, rotate
the control.
With the engine running, the volume level can
be adjusted between 0 and 35. If the audio unit
is turned off, it will re-start at the previously
selected volume level, provided that this is not
too loud or too quiet.

28
R

Quick Start
Tone and balance settings RADIO OPERATION
Autostore

Bass

1 2 3 4 5 6

FMA 14 : 54
2 106.5 Autostore
1 2 3 4 5 6

ICE2135 NAS

To autostore FM or AM stations, press and hold


ICE1618 ENG
the FM or AM buttons. Autostore will be shown
in the information display and the stations will
To change the Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader, be stored under the pre-set numbers, in the
Subwoofer and Logic 7 settings, press the Tone order that they are found.
button (arrowed) repeatedly until the required To access the stations once stored, press the
setting is displayed, then use the rotary control required pre-set number briefly.
to adjust the setting as required.
For further information, see TONE AND
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT, 299.

29
L

Quick Start
CD OPERATION When inserting a disc into either player, ensure
that the label side of the disc is facing upwards
Inserting a CD and present the disc to the slot. Do not push it
into the slot, the player mechanism will draw
the disc in automatically.
There will be a short pause whilst the player
CD No Discs 14 : 54
Press 1-6 reads the information from the disc, which will
then be displayed on the screen. Play will
commence at the first track on the newly
inserted disc.
Dual and DVDPlus discs
1 2 3
ABC DEF Please be aware that a new generation of DVD
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO discs is being adopted by the music industry.
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9 They are known as Dual Discs or DVDPlus
PQRS TUV WXYZ Please Wait
discs. They have digital music on one side and
0
video content on the other. Current in-car audio
systems with a front loading CD player may
load and play this type of disc, however, it is
likely that the disc will not eject and will block
CD 3 14 : 54
up the player. Such damage to a CD player will
Insert Disc
not be covered under warranty.

ICE1875 ENG

Before inserting a CD into the audio unit, select


CD mode by pressing the CD button.
Note: It is necessary to then select an empty CD
slot, by pressing the appropriate disc selection
button (e.g. 3). The six circles at the bottom
left-hand side of the screen represent the six
available CD slots. As soon as one has a CD in
it, its number will appear in the circle. Empty
slots are, therefore, those without numbers.

30
R

Quick Start
CD playback To start CD playback, briefly press the CD mode
button, followed by the disc number required. If
no disc number is selected, playback will begin
at one of two places:
CD 1 14 : 54
Tr 12 3 : 15 • If the discs contained in the player have not
1 2 3 4 5 6
been removed since their last use, playback
will begin from the point at which it was
stopped previously.
• If the discs contained in the player have not
1 2 3
ABC DEF
been used since they were inserted,
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
CD 3 14 : 54 playback will begin at the start of disc one.
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Loading If a CD is already inserted but the audio system
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
is currently in radio mode, press the CD mode
button to commence playback.

6CD-465

CD 3 14 : 54
Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6

ICE1887 ENG

31
L

Quick Start
VOICE RECOGNITION Defined voice commands
The voice control system understands
Activating the system
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
General commands
• Voice help - To list all commands.
• Notepad Help - To list Notepad
commands.
Audio commands
• Radio help - To list Radio commands.
• CD help - To list CD commands.
See Audio System, 293, for full operating
instructions.

LAN0237G
Navigation and Telephone commands
• Phone help - To list telephone commands.
To activate voice control:
• Navigation help - To list Navigation
• Briefly pull the control paddle (the Audio
commands.
will mute at this point). A beep will be
heard, and LISTENING will be displayed on Please refer to the Navigation and
the main message center to indicate that Telephone Handbook for full operating
the system is now waiting for a voice instructions.
command. For further information, see VOICE
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering RECOGNITION, 138.
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.

32
R

Gas Station Information


FUEL FILLER When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
Gas Station Information

and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise


Note: The fuel filler flap has a spring loaded
until you hear it click three times. Return the
release, do not force it open.
fuel filler flap to the closed position.
The fuel filler is located in the rear right-hand
fender. Press and release the center of the left
edge of the fuel filler flap to open. See arrow 1
position 1.
The fuel filler flap springs out, revealing the
filler cap 2.
2
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the
projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck,
LAN0438G
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover.
Note: For more detailed information, see FUEL
FILLER, 151.

Fuel type
V8 engines Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating of 91
or higher. See TYPE OF FUEL, 153.
Note: Mid or regular grade gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating
of not lower than 87 may also be used, but performance and fuel
economy will be reduced.

Engine oil top-up


V8 vehicles Use only oils certified for gasoline engines by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Use a 5W/30 oil meeting specification
API SM+ILSAC GF4.
Cooling system top-up
All vehicles to -40°C (-40°F) 50% mix of water and an approved antifreeze

Note: For more detailed information, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 287.

LAND ROVER RECOMMENDS

33
L

Gas Station Information


TIRE PRESSURES
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tires
(after the vehicle has been driven for a while). If
you have to check warm tires, you should
expect the pressures to have increased by
between 30 and 40 kPa (4 to 6 lb/in2). In this
circumstance, NEVER let air out of the tires in
order to match the recommended pressures.
See Checking tire pressures, 234

34
R

General Information
General Information

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY WARNING LABELS ATTACHED


The following warnings, cautions and symbols TO THE VEHICLE
used within the handbook call your attention to Warning labels attached to your
specific types of information. vehicle bearing this symbol mean: DO
Warnings NOT touch or adjust components until
you have read the relevant
WARNING instructions in the handbook.
Safety warnings are included in this Labels showing this symbol indicate
handbook. These indicate either a procedure that the ignition system utilises very
which must be followed precisely, or high voltages. DO NOT touch any
information that should be considered with ignition components while the ignition
great care in order to avoid the possibility of is turned on.
personal injury.
Warning labels
Cautions Labels are attached to your vehicle at several
positions. These are applied to draw your
Caution: Cautions are included in this attention to important subjects, e.g. tire
handbook. These indicate either a procedure pressures, tow bar use, air bags, roll-over risk,
which must be followed precisely, or engine compartment hazards, etc.
information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
damage to your vehicle. MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK
DATE : MM/YY GVWR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
GAWR FRONT: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
Symbols XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD

This recycling symbol identifies those XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
GAWR REAR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
items that must be disposed of safely in XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD

order to prevent unnecessary damage XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD

to the environment. THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE


U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE

This symbol identifies those features TESTMARK1234567890

that can be adjusted or disabled/enabled


TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE
by a Land Rover Dealer.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION


SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs
TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S
FRONT XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa MANUAL FOR
RTC500490

XXX/XXRXX
ADDITIONAL
REAR XXPSI XXXkpa
INFORMATION
SPARE TXXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa

LAN0166N

Example

35
L

General Information
It is important that you are familiar with these Event data recording
subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its Event data recorders are capable of collecting
features are used safely. Using the index at the and storing data during a crash or near-crash
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant event. The recorded information may assist in
topic for more information. the investigation of such an event. The modules
may record information about both the vehicle
WARNING
and the occupants, potentially including
Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance
information such as:
and hence, a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars, to enable the • How various systems in your vehicle were
vehicle to perform in a wide variety of off-road operating.
applications. An advantage of the higher • Whether or not the driver and passenger
ground clearance is a better view of the road seat belts were buckled.
allowing you to anticipate problems. • How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
the same speed as conventional passenger • How fast the vehicle was travelling.
cars any more than a low-slung sports car is
• Where the driver was positioning the
designed to perform satisfactorily under
steering wheel.
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid
sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvers. As with To access this information special equipment
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate must be connected directly to the recording
the vehicle correctly may result in loss of modules. Land Rover do not access event data
control or vehicle roll-over. recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
DATA RECORDING government authorities or third parties acting
Service data recording with lawful authority.
Service data recorders in your vehicle are Other parties may seek to access the
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information independently of Land Rover.
information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or
status of various systems and modules in the
vehicle, such as engine, accelerator, steering or
brakes.
In order to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Land Rover and service and repair
facilities may access vehicle diagnostic
information through a direct connection to your
vehicle.

36
R

General Information
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
components wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.

37
L

Reporting Safety Defects


Reporting Safety Defects

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


(U.S. ONLY) (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash, or could cause which could cause a crash, or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Transport Canada in addition to notifying Land
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Rover Canada.
Land Rover North America Inc. To contact Transport Canada, call their toll-free
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may number: 1-800-333-0510.
open an investigation and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your Dealer
or Land Rover North America Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safecar.gov; or write to:
Administrator,
NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street SW.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safecar.gov.

38
R

Parts and Accessories


Parts and Accessories

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES Land Rover parts are the only parts built to
original equipment specifications AND
WARNING approved by Land Rover designers; this means
The fitting of non-approved parts and that every single part and accessory has been
accessories, or the carrying out of rigorously tested by the same engineering team
non-approved alterations or conversions, that designed and built the vehicle and can
may be dangerous and could affect the safety therefore be guaranteed for twelve months with
of the vehicle and occupants and also unlimited mileage.
invalidate the terms and conditions of the A full list and description of all accessories is
vehicle warranty. available from Land Rover Dealer.
Land Rover will not accept any liability for
death, personal injury or damage to property Electrical equipment
which may occur as a direct result of fitment WARNING
of non-approved accessories or the carrying It is extremely hazardous to fit or replace
out of non-approved conversions to Land parts or accessories, the installation of which
Rover vehicles. requires the dismantling of, or addition to,
Land Rover strongly advise against making either the electrical or fuel systems.
any modifications to the suspension or
steering system. This could seriously affect ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Dealer before
the handling and stability of the vehicle fitting any accessory.
leading to loss of control or roll-over. Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories, may
be dangerous and could invalidate the vehicle
The vehicle has been designed, built and tested warranty.
to cope with a variety of off-road driving
conditions, some of which can place the It is recommended that you always consult a
severest possible demands on control systems Land Rover Dealer for advice regarding the
and components. As such, fitting replacement approval, suitability, installation and use of any
parts and accessories that have been developed parts or accessories before fitting.
and tested to the same stringent standards as In certain countries, it is illegal to fit parts which
the original components will safeguard the have not been made to the vehicle
continued reliability, safety and performance of manufacturers' specification.
the vehicle. Owners should ensure that any parts or
To augment the vehicle's already impressive accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
performance, a comprehensive range of Land abroad will also conform to the legal
Rover approved spare parts and accessories is requirements of their own country when they
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide return home.
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be
applied.

39
L

Parts and Accessories


SRS/Air bag

WARNING
The components that make up the SRS/air bag
are sensitive to electrical or physical
interference, either of which could easily
damage the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the air bag
module.
To prevent any SRS/air bag malfunction,
ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Dealer before
fitting any of the following:
• Electronic equipment such as a mobile
phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
• Accessories attached to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification involving the removal or
repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the SRS components
(yellow wiring harness), including: the
steering wheel, steering column,
instrument and facia panels.
• Any modification to the facia panels or
steering wheel.

40
R

Keys and Remote Controls


Controls and Instruments

KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS Note: Should a remote control be lost or


damaged, a replacement can only be obtained
Caution: Keep the spare remote control in a
from your Land Rover Dealer, where it will be
safe place - NOT IN THE VEHICLE.
programmed to your vehicle. The Dealer will
require proof of ownership, and keep a log of all
enquiries for replacement remote controls.
It is advisable to notify your Dealer as soon as
possible if a remote control is lost or stolen,
and have the remaining remote control
reprogrammed. This will prevent access to the
vehicle using the lost/stolen remote control.
Compliance
The remote control complies with part 15 of the
LAN0112G FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following
You have been supplied with two remote conditions:
controls with integral keys which operate all of • This device may not cause harmful
the vehicle’s locks. interference.
The operation of all buttons, on remote • This device must accept any interference
controls, will be inhibited whilst a key is in the received, including interference that may
starter switch. cause undesired operation.
Note: The remote control may not operate Any changes or modifications to the remote
correctly in areas that are subject to control not expressly approved by the
interference from other radio equipment manufacturer or Land Rover North America Inc.
operating on a similar frequency. Areas where, could void the user’s authority to operate the
for example, equipment such as amateur radio, equipment.
medical devices, telecommunications Transmitter FCC ID: NT8-15K6014CFFTXA
equipment or other remotely operated alarms
Receiver FCC ID: LQN5752
are in use may cause difficulty. If such
difficulties are experienced, try to operate the
remote control as close as possible to the
vehicle, or use the key in the door lock. See
Emergency locking/unlocking, 50.
The remote controls supplied with your vehicle
are programmed to your security system - the
engine cannot be started without a remote
control programmed to your vehicle.

41
L

Keys and Remote Controls


Remote control battery LAND ROVER BUTTON
Caution: The remote control contains delicate
Customer programmable button
electronic circuits and must be protected from
impact and water damage, high temperatures WARNING
and humidity, direct sunlight and the effects Be aware that the previously programmed
of solvents, waxes and abrasive cleaners. feature will be activated when the button is
The battery is rechargeable. The fact that the initially pressed to start the programming
battery needs recharging will be apparent from sequence.
the following:
• KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed in the
main message center.
• A gradual deterioration in range and
performance will be noticed.
Battery recharge
Insert the key into the starter switch and start
the engine. This will start to recharge the
remote control battery.
Vehicle security LAN0128G
For your own safety, and that of the vehicle,
The fourth button - marked with the Land Rover
when the vehicle is left unattended you should:
logo - on the remote control can be
• Apply the parkbrake. programmed to give remote operation of one of
• Remove all keys and remote controls from the following functions:
the vehicle prior to locking the doors. • panic alarm
• Close all doors, windows, luggage • headlamp courtesy delay
compartment (including blind), sunroof,
• air suspension control
and glovebox.
• tailgate release
• Park the vehicle where it is visible (a well lit
area after dark). • tailglass release
• Keep your vehicle’s keys safely out of sight. Note: Programming and subsequent use of the
Land Rover button will not occur if the key is in
• NEVER leave children or pets unattended in
the starter switch.
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave luggage or valuables on
display.

42
R

Keys and Remote Controls


REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING Headlamp courtesy delay

Panic alarm

LAN0119G

2
LAN0118G 3 Programme by keeping the Land Rover button
pressed and also flashing the headlamps. A
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button chime from the instrument panel will confirm
pressed and also pressing the hazard warning successful programming.
lamps button on the instrument panel. A chime
A short press of the Land Rover button will now
from the instrument panel will confirm
cause the vehicle’s headlamps to illuminate for
successful programming.
the length of time specified in Settings.
A short press of the Land Rover button will now See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 86.
cause the vehicle’s alarm to be sounded and the
A second press of the button after three
hazard warning lamps to flash.
seconds will deactivate the lamps. A further
The alarm is turned off by pressing the lock or press, within three seconds, will activate the
unlock buttons on the remote control or reverse lamps. A further press will deactivate
inserting the key in the starter switch. the headlamps and reverse lamps.

43
L

Keys and Remote Controls


Air suspension control Single-point entry
This is a personal security feature, which
enables only the driver's door to be unlocked,
leaving the other doors in a locked state.
Single-point entry can be disabled on individual
remote controls by pressing and holding the
lock and unlock buttons together for three
seconds.
LAN0120G All doors will now unlock with a single press.
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button Repeating the procedure will re-enable single
pressed and also pressing the suspension point entry.
control switch. A chime from the instrument Each time single-point entry is enabled or
panel will confirm successful programming. disabled, the vehicle will lock then unlock into
Programming of this function must be done the selected mode.
within one minute of switching off the engine.
After programming, to change the suspension
height via the remote control, remove the
starter key, turn on the hazard warning lamps
and close all the doors. Remote operation is not
possible unless this is done.
To raise the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button and Lock button.
To lower the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button and Unlock button.
If any button is released during the raising or
lowering of the suspension, all movement of
the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
buttons are pressed again.
The height will initially change slowly but, after
three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the height is changing, a symbol on the
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
direction of movement.
See Adjusting suspension heights, 185.
If the starting height is above or below On-road
height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again. See AIR SUSPENSION, 184.

44
R

Keys and Remote Controls


Tailgate release Tailglass release

LAN0124G

Programme by keeping the Land Rover button


LAN0125G pressed and also pressing the main tailglass
release button situated under the rear license
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button
plate plinth.
pressed and also pressing the main tailgate
release button on the rear tailgate. A short press of the button will now cause the
vehicle’s tailglass to release.
A short press of the button will now cause the
vehicle’s tailgate to release.

45
L

Locks and Alarms


Locks and Alarms

ALARM SYSTEM Anti-theft alarm indicator

LAN0729G

The indicator provides information about the


status of the alarm and immobiliser systems, as
follows:
When the alarm is armed:
LAN0113G
The indicator will double flash for 10 seconds,
Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
electronic anti-theft alarm and engine disarmed and remobilised.
immobilisation system. There are also a
number of additional security features, some of When the alarm is disarmed but the vehicle is
which are selectable options and some are immobilised (key out of starter switch):
standard features of the vehicle. The indicator will single flash until the alarm is
In order to ensure maximum security and armed or the vehicle is remobilised.
operating convenience, you are strongly When the alarm is disarmed and the vehicle
advised to gain a full understanding of the is mobilised (key in starter switch):
features and alternatives available, by
The indicator gives a one-second flash.
thoroughly reading this section of the
handbook.

46
R

Locks and Alarms


If the alarm sounds
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm will sound
and the hazard warning lamps will flash for 30
seconds, before resetting to the same
protection status that existed prior to the alarm
being triggered.
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock
button on the remote control or insert the key
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button
will keep the alarm armed.
When the vehicle is disarmed, the hazard
warning lamps will quickly flash eight times if
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle was
last armed.
Perimetric alarm
This feature is activated automatically
whenever the vehicle is locked using the remote
control and protects the doors, hood and
tailgate.
If any of these apertures are opened, or a key
that has not been programmed to the vehicle is
inserted into the starter switch, while the
feature is activated, the alarm will be triggered.
When the perimetric alarm is activated the
direction/turn indicators will flash three times,
and the anti-theft alarm indicator will flash.
Mislock
If an aperture is open when an attempt is made
to lock the vehicle an audible warning will
sound once to indicate that the vehicle is not
secure.

47
L

Locks and Alarms


ENGINE IMMOBILISATION Caution: The immobiliser may suffer
Engine immobilisation is an important aspect of interference from other legal users of this
the security system. It is designed to safeguard frequency band.
the vehicle from theft, should the driver forget The immobiliser system operates on a
to lock the doors. The system prevents the frequency subject to USA Federal
engine from being started unless the GENUINE Communications Commission (FCC) rules. The
remote control key is inserted into the starter device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules
switch. and RSS-210 of the industry Canada.
Engine immobilisation is automatic five Operation is subject to the two following
seconds after the key is removed from the conditions:
starter switch. 1. The device may not cause harmful
Note: The engine will be re-mobilised interference.
automatically whenever the genuine remote 2. This device must accept any interference
control key is inserted into the starter received, including interference that may
switch.When this happens, the anti-theft alarm cause undesired operation.
indicator will illuminate for one second and
The immobiliser frequency approval numbers
then extinguish.
for the USA and Canada are shown below:
USA - TTRT5SJB.
Canada - IC: 6276A-T5SJBR1
Note: Note: The manufacturer is not
responsible for any radio interference or TV
interference caused by unauthorized
modifications to this equipment. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.

48
R

Locks and Alarms


LOCKING/UNLOCKING The four buttons on the remote control are used
While it is not necessary to point the remote as follows:
control at the vehicle, the remote control must 1. Key release button.
be within range of the vehicle when a button is 2. Lock button: Press to lock all doors and to
pressed. activate the perimetric alarm.
Note: If the remote control fails to work even The direction/turn indicator lamps will flash
when close to the vehicle, it could be that it is three times.
not synchronised with the system. See
3. Unlock button: Press once to disarm the
Emergency locking/unlocking, 50. Putting the
alarm and unlock the driver’s door and to
key in the starter switch and running the engine
activate the Lazy entry feature. See Lazy
for six minutes will restore full operation.
entry, 58. Press again to unlock the
The operating range may vary depending upon remaining doors.
remote control battery condition and may See Single-point entry, 44.
sometimes be limited by physical and
In either case, the interior lamps illuminate
geographical factors beyond your control.
and the direction/turn indicators flash
Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the vehicle once.
will not respond to remote control commands.
The hazard warning lamps will quickly flash
Locking with the remote control eight times when the vehicle is disarmed if
Remove the key from the starter switch and the alarm has sounded since the vehicle
shut all doors, the hood and the tailgate. was last armed.
4. Customer Configuration - Land Rover
button: This button can be configured to
operate panic alarm, headlamp courtesy
delay, tailgate release, tailglass release or
1 suspension control.
See LAND ROVER BUTTON, 42.

4
LAN0114G

49
L

Locks and Alarms


Partial arming Removing the cap
If an aperture (door, hood or tailgate) is not
fully closed when the remote control lock
button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly to
signal that an aperture is still open. The alarm
will remain disarmed and all of the closed
apertures will lock.
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
system will automatically arm, signalled by
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps.
Emergency locking/unlocking
Under a removable cap on the left front door
outer handle, there is an emergency-use door
lock.

LAN0116G

1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the


handle cap.
2. The cap can now be removed at the forward
edge and unhooked from the rear edge.
3. Remove the key from the slot and use it in
the emergency lock.
Locking
Turn the key clockwise to lock only the local
door. To lock all of the doors press the master
lock switch, then exit the vehicle through the
front left door. Lock the left front door by
turning the key clockwise (this will not arm the
alarm system).

50
R

Locks and Alarms


Unlocking Speed-related locking
Turn the key in the left front door lock This security feature locks all the doors
counter-clockwise to unlock only the local automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds
door. 8 km/h (5 mph).
If the alarm system is not armed, turn the key Note: The speed at which speed-related locking
counter-clockwise to unlock the left front door. occurs is not selectable by the driver. Any
To unlock the rest of the doors press the master presses of the master lock or unlock switches
unlock switch. will over-ride the speed locking function, and
Note: Unlocking the left front door by the key will remain in that state for the whole journey.
will not disarm the alarm, if it was previously Speed-related locking can be selected
set. The alarm will sound when the door is or deselected by a Land Rover Dealer or
unlocked. To disable the alarm, insert the key by the driver.
into the starter switch. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 86.
Refitting the cap Automatic relock
1. Insert the key fully into the slot in the If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
handle cap. control and one minute elapses before a door or
2. Hook the cap onto the lock barrel at the rear the tailgate is opened, the vehicle will relock and
edge. the alarm will re-arm.
3. Push the front edge of the cap onto the Automatic unlocking
panel. If the vehicle is involved in a collision forceful
4. Remove the key from the slot. enough to cause a restraints device to deploy,
all door locks will automatically be unlocked
Master lock switch and unlock switch
and the hazard warning lamps will start to flash.
The interior lamps will also illuminate.
1 3 2

LAN0121N

1. Pressing the master unlock switch will


unlock all of the doors.
2. Pressing the master lock switch will lock all
of the doors.
3. Simultaneously pressing both the master
lock and unlock switches for three seconds
will cause the whole tailgate to release.

51
L

Locks and Alarms


Interior door handles and locking levers CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH, NEVER LEAVE
CHILDREN UNSUPERVISED IN THE VEHICLE.

LAN0122G

From inside the vehicle, each door can be


individually locked by pushing the appropriate
lever (arrowed).
To unlock and open a front door, simply pull the
door handle.
To open a rear door, first return the locking LAN0123G
lever to its unlocked position, then pull the door
handle. Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.
When the master lock or unlock switch is used, Open a rear door and insert the starter key into
or speed related locking is activated, all door the child safety keyhole. Turn the key one
locking levers will activate automatically. quarter of a turn so that the top of the key
moves away from the vehicle. Repeat for the
other door.
With the child safety locks engaged, the rear
doors cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle. This prevents a door from being
opened accidentally.
Inserting the key and turning it in the opposite
direction disengages the lock.

52
R

Locks and Alarms


TAILGATE Opening the tailglass

Opening the tailgate

LAN0124G

With all doors unlocked, press the touch pad on


the underside of the exterior handle and pull to
open.
LAN0125G

With all doors unlocked, press the tailgate


release button on the right-hand side of the
tailgate.
If the tailgate fails to open, an emergency
procedure is available.
Note: If the tailgate is open, the system
prohibits the tailglass release, and vice versa. It
will only accept another release when the open
panel has been closed.
Tailgate emergency unlock
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the whole tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.
Power closure
The tailgate incorporates a ‘Power closure’
feature, which removes the need to ‘slam’ the
tailgate when closing.

53
L

Seats
Seats

FRONT SEATS
A
WARNING
To reduce the risk of loss of control and
personal injury, DO NOT adjust the driver's B
seat while the vehicle is in motion.

Sitting correctly
The seats, head restraints, seat belts and air
bags all contribute to the protection of the
occupants. Optimal use of these components LAN0127N

will give you more protection. Therefore,


observe the following points:
• Sit in the most upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as possible
and the backrest reclined not more than A
30 degrees.
• Do not move the driver’s seat too close to
the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
distance B of at least 25 cm (10 in.)
between the center of the breastbone and
the cover of the steering wheel air bag is
recommended. The driver should hold the
steering wheel with slightly bent arms. The
legs should also be slightly bent so that the
pedals can be pressed to the floor.
• The seat belt should rest in the center of the
shoulder. The lap part should fit tightly
across the hips and not on the stomach.
Make sure your driving position is comfortable
and enables you to maintain full control of the
vehicle. A properly adjusted seat helps reduce
the risk of injury from sitting too close to an
inflating air bag.
Note: For information on adjusting the steering
column, see STEERING COLUMN
ADJUSTMENT, 80.

54
R

Seats
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT Note: The position of any part of the power
operated seats can be changed with the starter
WARNING key in positions I or II. Power operated memory
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the driver’s seat also has a 10 minute active period
vehicle is in motion. (Non-memory power operated seats up to 15
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to minutes) initiated when:
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury. • The driver’s door is opened/closed.
• The starter key is turned to the off position.
The seat adjustment controls are situated on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.

1
3

1
2

4 3

LAN0135G

55
L

Seats
1. Forward/backward adjustment Lumbar support adjustment
Push and hold the switch to move the seat to (Driver’s seat only)
the desired position. Release the switch to stop
adjustment.
2. Seat back adjustment
Twist the switch until the desired seat back
angle is achieved. Release the switch to stop
adjustment.

WARNING
DO NOT travel with the seat backs reclined
steeply rearwards. Optimum benefit is
obtained from the seat belt with the seat back
angle set to no more than 30 degrees from the
upright (vertical). LAN0138G

Failure to maintain the correct seat back A separate switch located in the side of the seat
angle will reduce the effectiveness of the seat provides for adjustment of lumbar support.
belts and increase the risk of serious injury or Press the front end of the switch to stiffen the
death in a crash. support or the rear end of the switch to relax the
support. Release the switch to stop adjustment.
3. Seat cushion height adjustment Folding armrest
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower
the cushion. Release the switch to stop
adjustment.
4. Seat cushion edge adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower
the front edge of the cushion. Release the
switch to stop adjustment.

LAN0130G

Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front


seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal
position or can be stowed vertically alongside
the seat backrest.

56
R

Seats
The horizontal position can be adjusted for Remove the head restraint by pressing the
height by turning the knob set into the end of collar button as indicated, whilst lifting the
the armrest. Turning the knob clockwise raises restraint clear of the seat.
the armrest; counter-clockwise lowers it. To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
Head restraint adjustment and removal posts into the collars and press the restraint
downwards until a click is heard.
WARNING
Rear Seat Entertainment
Head restraints are designed to support the
back of the head (NOT THE NECK), and to WARNING
restrain rearward movement of the head in The video display screens contain toxic
the event of a collision. The restraint must be substances including Mercury. These
positioned as described to be effective. substances can cause severe illness and
DO NOT drive or carry passengers with the possibly death.
head restraints removed from occupied seats, In the event that a video display screen is
or adjust the head restraints while the vehicle damaged, avoid all contact with it, and
is in motion. contact your dealer as soon as possible.
Failure to have the head restraint installed
and properly positioned will increase the Caution: When rear seat passengers are
potential for serious injuries. entering or leaving the vehicle it is important
that they do not hold the head restraint to ease
entry/exit. This may damage the Video
Display Screens.
The Video Display Screens fitted to the rear of
the front seat head restraints are NOT
touch-screens. Avoid contact with the screen
wherever possible.
Only clean the screens using the Land Rover
approved cleaning materials available from
your Land Rover dealer.
If Rear Seat Entertainment is fitted, the front
head restraints can be adjusted for height, but
cannot be removed from the seat.

HEATED SEATS
LAN0131G
For information on operating the front and rear
seat heaters see, SEAT HEATERS, 122.
Adjust the head restraint correctly, up or down
by pressing the collar button as indicated. The
top of the head restraint should be level with the
top of the head.
See Sitting correctly, 54.

57
L

Seats
DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY Setting the memory pre-sets
FACILITY 1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
I or ll.
WARNING
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
Before activating the seat memory, ensure
desired position. See EXTERIOR
that the area immediately surrounding the
MIRRORS, 81.
seat is clear of obstructions and that all
occupants are clear of moving parts. 3. Press the memory store button 1 to
activate the memory function.
4. Within five seconds, press the desired
2 1 pre-set button 2.
5. Memory Stored will be displayed on the
message center to confirm the storing
action. A single chime will sound from the
instrument panel to confirm storing.
Recalling a stored seat position
Providing the power operated memory seat is
active, press the pre-set button associated with
LAN0136G 3 the desired driving position. The seat and
mirrors will move to the position stored on that
1. Memory store button pre-set.
2. Memory pre-set buttons A confirmation message will display in the
3. Seat adjustment controls. message center and a double chime will sound
See FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT, 55. when adjustments are complete.
Your vehicle can memorise up to three different Note: To stop seat movement at any time when
driver seating positions for each of three recalling a memory setting, press any seat
possible starter keys. This enables three adjustment control.
separate drivers to achieve optimum comfort at Lazy entry
the touch of a button.
When the lazy entry option is selected and the
vehicle is unlocked using the remote control,
the vehicle adjusts the driver’s seat and the
exterior mirrors to the position associated with
that particular remote control.
Lazy entry and associated options can be
selected or deselected by a Land Rover Dealer
or by selecting Settings. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 86.

58
R

Seats
REAR SEATS Before attempting to fold down the seats,
remove the outboard seat belts from the seat
WARNING belt guides and remove any items from the rear
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the seats and footwell.
vehicle is in motion. If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to move them forward. They can be returned to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury. their original position after the rear seat backs
have been folded down.
WARNING Ensure that the head restraints are fully
It is extremely dangerous to ride in the lowered, See Head restraint adjustment and
loadspace. In a collision, anyone riding in removal, 57. Press in the collar at the base of
this area is more likely to be injured or killed. the head restraint support, and push the head
Do not allow anyone to ride in any area of your restraint down.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and Using the strap at the rear of each cushion, pull
seat belts. Be sure that everyone in your the required cushions forwards as far as they
vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt will travel .
properly.
To fold a backrest forwards, pull the seat
backrest release lever(s). While pulling the
Folding down the seats lever(s) located on the top edges of the
backrests, tip the seat backrest(s) forwards as
far as possible.
Note: Only Land Rover approved seat covers
and accessories should be used on these seats.

LAN0139G

One or both parts of the split rear seat can be


fully folded to further increase the rear
loadspace.

59
L

Seats
Returning the seats to the upright position Visually check that the lever is fully in place. If
it has not returned to its locked position, red
WARNING flags will be visible around the lever sides.
After the seat is returned to the upright
To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards to
position, the latching mechanism should be
the required height.
checked and physically tested to ensure that
both the seat base and backrest are secure Replace the outboard seat belts back into the
before driving. seat belt guides.
Also, ensure that the head restraint is Rear seat armrest
adjusted correctly for each passenger (the top
of the head restraint should be above the
center line of the head).

LAN0142G

To release the armrest, first pull the loop at the


top of the center seat/armrest (see inset.), then
push the armrest downwards to the required
position.
To replace, raise the armrest and push until a
LAN0140G
click is heard when latched.
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
move them forward. They can be returned to
their original position after the rear seats have
been returned to the upright position.
Pull the strap vertically on the back of the seat
to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to raise the
backrest(s) until they click into position. Push
the seat cushion(s) firmly back into position.

60
R

Seats
Head restraint adjustment and removal

WARNING
Head restraints are designed to support the
back of the head (NOT THE NECK), and to
restrain rearward movement of the head in
the event of a collision. The restraint must be
positioned as described to be effective.
DO NOT drive or carry passengers with the
head restraints removed from occupied seats,
or adjust the head restraints while the vehicle
is in motion.
Failure to have the head restraint installed
and properly positioned will increase the LAN0143G

potential for serious injuries. Remove the head restraint by pressing the
collar button and indented button as indicated,
whilst lifting the restraint clear of the seat.
To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
posts into the collars and press the restraint
downwards until a click is heard.

LAN0141G

Adjust the head restraint correctly (up or down)


for each passenger by pressing the collar
button as indicated. The top of the head
restraint should be level with the top of the
head.

61
L

Seat Belts
Seat Belts

SEAT BELTS SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS


The use of front and rear seat belts is
WARNING
mandatory in most states. Using seat belts
The seat belt pretensioners will only be
saves lives. They should be worn by all
activated once and then MUST BE REPLACED
occupants whenever the vehicle is in use, for
by a Land Rover Dealer. Failure to replace the
maximum protection.
pretensioners will reduce the efficiency of the
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are provided vehicle's front restraint systems.
for both front seat occupants and all rear seat
After any impact, always have the seat belts
positions.
and pretensioners checked and, if necessary,
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the replaced by a Land Rover Dealer.
seat belts allows the wearers to move their
In the interests of safety, it is recommended
upper bodies to reach various controls. The
that removal or replacement of the front seats
seat belt locks automatically with accelerated
and seat belts should only be carried out by a
body movement or in the event of emergency
Land Rover Dealer.
braking.
The seat belts include a buckle sensor to detect The seat belt pretensioners activate in
when the buckle is latched. conjunction with the air bag SRS and provide
The front seat belt assemblies are fitted with additional protection in the event of a severe
pre-tensioners. The pre-tensioners operate frontal impact on the vehicle (see HOW THE AIR
with the air bags as part of the Air bag BAG SRS WORKS, 74). The pretensioners
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS). See automatically retract the seat belts fitted to the
HOW THE AIR BAG SRS WORKS, 74. front seats. This reduces any slack in both the
lap and diagonal portions of the belts, thereby
Seat belt warning indicator
reducing forward movement of the belt wearer
Seat belt warning commences in the event of a severe frontal collision.
when the starter switch is turned
The air bag SRS warning indicator on the
to position ll and the driver’s belt
instrument pack will alert you to any
is unbuckled.
malfunction of the seat belt pretensioners.
Seat belt reminder If the pretensioners have been activated, the
A warning chime will sound (one second seat belts will still function as restraints, and
frequency) if the driver's seat belt has not been must be worn in the event that the vehicle
fastened when the starter switch is turned on. remains in a driveable condition.
The chime operates in conjunction with the seat Note: The seat belt pretensioners will be
belt warning indicator and sounds for 6 activated in major side and frontal impacts and
seconds, or until the seat belt is fastened in roll-overs.
(whichever occurs first).

62
R

Seat Belts
Seat belt locking mechanism SEAT BELT USE DURING PREGNANCY
WARNING WARNING
Where possible, use the seat belt automatic Position the seat belt correctly for the safety
locking mechanism to secure large items that of the mother and unborn child. Never wear
are to be carried on the seats. In the event of just the lap strap and never sit on the lap strap
an accident, loose items become projectiles when using just the shoulder strap. Both of
capable of causing serious injury. Care must these actions are extremely dangerous and
be taken to prevent any sharp edges may increase your risk of serious injury in the
damaging the belt. event of an accident.
Use the seat belt automatic locking
mechanism to restrain pets in harnesses or WARNING
pet carriers when not utilising the loadspace. Never place anything between you and the
seat belt in an attempt to cushion the impact
The passenger seat belts have a special locking in the event of an accident. It can be
mechanism which retains large items securely. dangerous and reduce the effectiveness of the
To use: seat belt in preventing injury.
1. Place the item on the seat.
Position the lap strap comfortably across the
2. Pull the seat belt around the item, using
hips, beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonal
both the lap and shoulder parts of the belt.
part of the seat belt between the breasts and to
3. Fasten the seat belt. the side of the abdomen. Ensure that the seat
4. Pull on the shoulder part of the belt to belt is not slack or twisted.
unreel all of the remaining belt. This will
engage the automatic locking feature which
only allows the belt to retract.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the item
(a clicking sound will confirm that the
mechanism has engaged).
6. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
immediately above the item. The item will
now be held firmly in position by the belt.
LAN0144G
When the seat belt is released and is allowed to
fully retract, the seat belt locking mechanism
reverts to normal operation.

63
L

Seat Belts
SEAT BELT SAFETY WARNING
WARNING Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly -
an improperly worn seat belt increases the
Seat belts are life saving equipment. In a
risk of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision, occupants not wearing a seat belt
collision.
can be thrown around inside, or possibly
thrown out of the vehicle. This is likely to Belts should not be worn with the straps
result in more serious injuries than would twisted.
have been the case had a seat belt been Each belt assembly must only be used by one
properly worn. It may even result in loss of occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around
life. a child being carried on the occupant’s lap.
Make sure ALL occupants are securely It is essential to replace the entire assembly
strapped in at all times - even for the shortest after it has been worn in a severe impact even
journeys. if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
The air bag supplemental restraint system No modifications or additions should be made
(SRS) is designed to add to the overall by the user which will either prevent the seat
effectiveness of the seat belts. It does not belt adjusting devices from operating to
replace them. SEAT BELTS MUST ALWAYS BE remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
WORN. assembly from being adjusted to remove
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony slack.
structure of the body and should be worn low Should the seat belt not retract and remain at
across the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as its static length, consult your Land Rover
applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt Dealer immediately.
across the abdominal area must be avoided. Care should be taken to avoid contamination
DO NOT wear seat belts over hard, sharp or of the webbing with polishes, oils and
fragile items in clothing, such as pens, keys, chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
spectacles, etc. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as soap and water. The belt should be replaced
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or
the protection for which they are designed. A damaged.
slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
afforded to the wearer.
DO NOT allow front seat occupants to travel
with the seat backs reclined steeply
rearwards. Optimum benefit is obtained from
the seat belt with the seatback angle set to no
more than 30 degrees from the upright.

64
R

Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELTS Upper anchorage adjustment

Fastening the seat belts WARNING


Maladjustment of the seat belt could reduce
WARNING its effectiveness in a crash. Always ensure
Never wear just the lap strap of a lap/shoulder that the anchorage is correctly located and
diagonal seat belt and never sit on the lap properly locked in one of the height positions
strap using just the shoulder strap. Both of before driving and DO NOT adjust the height
these actions are extremely dangerous and once the vehicle is in motion.
may increase your risk of serious injury.

LAN0146G
LAN0145G
The height of the seat belt upper anchorage can
Pull the belt over the shoulder and across the be adjusted for comfort AND safety on both
chest and, ensuring that the webbing is not front seats. Press down (solid arrow) to release
twisted, insert the metal tongue plate into the the catch, then lift or push down to adjust the
buckle nearest the wearer - a CLICK indicates height of the anchorage. For safety, the seat belt
that the belt is securely locked. should always be worn with the webbing
Releasing the belt crossing the shoulder MIDWAY BETWEEN THE
NECK AND THE EDGE OF THE SHOULDER.
Press the RED button on the seat belt buckle.
Ensure the anchorage has clicked into one of
the locked positions before driving.
Where possible, rear seat passengers should
adjust their position on the seat to enable the
seat belt webbing to cross the shoulder without
pressing on the neck.

65
L

Seat Belts
CARING FOR SEAT BELTS Service information

WARNING WARNING
Always replace a seat belt that shows signs of DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
webbing damage or has withstood the strain modify or tamper with any part of the
of a severe vehicle impact. pretensioner and air bag SRS, or wiring in the
vicinity of a pretensioner or air bag SRS
Regularly inspect the belt webbing for signs of component; this could cause the system to
fraying, cuts and wear; also pay particular activate, resulting in personal injury.
attention to the condition of the fixing points
and adjusters. In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover
Dealer if:
DO NOT bleach or dye the webbing and avoid
contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or • an air bag inflates.
chemicals. See Seat belts, 252. • a pretensioner activates.
Testing inertia reel belts • the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
even if the pretensioner has not activated.
• With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.
• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the
webbing to the limit of its travel. Check that
unreeling is free from snatches and snags
and then allow the belt to FULLY retract.
• Partially unreel the webbing, then hold and
give it a quick forward pull. The mechanism
must lock automatically and prevent any
further unreeling.
If a seat belt should fail any of these tests,
contact your Land Rover Dealer immediately.
Note: If the vehicle is parked on ground that is
not level, the seat belt mechanism may lock.
This is not a fault; gently ease the belt from the
upper anchorage to release.

66
R

Child Restraints
Child Restraints

CHILD SEATS The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are


designed for adults and larger children. For
WARNING their safety, it is very important that all infants
EXTREME HAZARD. Do not use a rearward and children under 12 years are restrained in a
facing child restraint on a seat protected by an suitable child safety seat appropriate to their
air bag in front of it. There is a risk of serious age and size.
injury or death when the air bag deploys. Only fit a child seat that has been approved for
use in your vehicle, and ensure that the
WARNING manufacturer's fitting instructions are followed
Do not use a forward-facing seat until a child exactly.
is above the minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) For optimum safety, children should travel in
and able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of the rear of the vehicle at all times, front
two, a child’s spine and neck are not passenger seat travel is NOT recommended.
sufficiently developed to avoid injury in a
Note: Crash statistics show that children are
frontal impact.
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions, than they are in the front.
WARNING However, if it is essential that a child travel in
DO NOT allow a baby or infant to be carried on the front, set the seat fully rearward and seat
the lap. The force of a crash can increase the child in a FORWARD FACING child seat.
effective body weight by as much as 30 times,
making it impossible to hold on to the child.
Children typically require the use of a booster
seat appropriate to their age and size, thereby
enabling the seat belts to be properly fitted,
reducing the risk of injury in a crash.
Children could be endangered in a crash if
their child restraints are not properly secured
in the vehicle. LAN0164G

DO NOT use a child seat that hooks over the This symbol affixed to the passenger side B
seat back. This type of seat cannot be post of your vehicle, warns against the use of a
satisfactorily secured, and is unlikely to be REAR-FACING child seat in the front passenger
safe for your child. seat, when a passenger air bag is fitted and
Never leave a child unattended in your operational.
vehicle.

67
L

Child Restraints
Seat belt locking mechanism Child restraints for small children and babies
The passenger seat belts have a special locking Child seats and restraint systems designed for
mechanism which aids the retention of child your vehicle will be one of two types:
seats. The procedure to install a child seat is as • Those secured in vehicle seats by the seat
follows: belts.
1. Place the child seat in the vehicle, attach • LATCH type child restraints employing
the seat belt and secure the buckle in anchor bars built into the rear seat frame.
accordance with the manufacturer’s fitting
All new and most older type child restraint
instructions.
systems incorporate a tether strap which can
2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to be attached to an anchorage point on the
unreel all of the remaining webbing to the vehicle. See Tether strap anchorages, 70.
limit of its travel. This will engage the
automatic locking feature, which then acts Child restraints for larger children
as a ratchet, allowing the webbing ONLY to In a situation where a child is too large to fit into
retract. a child safety seat, but is still too small to safely
3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child fit the 3 point seat belt properly, a booster seat
seat (a clicking sound will confirm that the is recommended for maximum safety. Follow
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing the manufacturer’s fitting instructions exactly,
the child seat into the vehicle seat. then adjust the seat belt to suit.
4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
immediately above the child restraint. This
seat belt should now be locked and the
child seat held firmly in position.
When the child seat is removed and all of the
seat belt webbing is allowed to retract, the seat
belt locking mechanism reverts to normal
operation.

68
R

Child Restraints
LATCH CHILD RESTRAINTS Fitting LATCH child restraints
(Rear seats) WARNING
WARNING If the restraint is not correctly anchored, there
DO NOT attempt to fit LATCH restraints to the is a significant risk of injury to the child in the
center seating position - the anchor bars are event of a collision or emergency braking.
not designed to hold a LATCH restraint in this
position. LATCH child restraints should only be fitted in
the two outer seating positions of the rear
Both outer, rear seating positions in your seats. Anchor bars built into the rear seat
vehicle are equipped to accept LATCH frame, enable the LATCH restraints to be
restraints. securely attached to the vehicle seat only in
these positions.
This symbol on the label sewn into
the seats indicates the location of In addition, two tether anchor bars are fitted to
the LATCH lower anchorages. back of the rear seats, to secure child restraint
anchor straps.
When fitting LATCH child restraints, always
follow the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the restraint.
Once the LATCH restraint is installed, you are
recommended to test the security of the
installation before seating the child. Attempt to
twist the restraint from side to side and to pull
the restraint away from the vehicle seat; then
check that the anchors are still securely in
place.

H6019G

69
L

Child Restraints
Tether strap anchorages Attaching tether straps

WARNING WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to Always follow the child seat or restraint
withstand only loads imposed by correctly system manufacturer’s instructions when
fitted child restraints. Under no fitting tether straps.
circumstances are they to be used for adult When fitting a child seat or restraint system,
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other always pass the tether strap over the top of
items or equipment to the vehicle. the seat back and beneath the underside of
the head restraint.
Upper tether anchorages are provided for each
If a child seat or restraint system is to be fitted
seating position equipped to accept LATCH
to the center seating position, the center
child restraints. Move the hinged panel to
armrest must be in the stowed position
expose the anchor points.
(folded into the seat).

FRONT OF 1. Install the child restraint securely in one of


VEHICLE
the second row seating positions.
2. Pass the tether strap over the back of the
vehicle seat and beneath the underside of
the head restraint.
3. Attach the clip on the head of the tether
strap to the tether anchor on the back of the
vehicle seat.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack in the webbing.

LAN0151K

Note: Always ensure that, if an upper tether is


provided, it is secured and tightened properly
as this provides the maximum protection for a
child.

70
R

Child Restraints
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTS LATCH child restraints
Follow the check list every time a child travels
Non-LATCH child restraints
in the vehicle:
Follow the check list every time a child travels
• Always attach the top tether when installing
in the vehicle:
the LATCH seat.
• Carefully follow the instructions provided
• Carefully follow the instructions supplied
by the manufacturer of the restraint
with the child seat.
system.
• Always give the LATCH seat a final pull to
• Always use the appropriate child restraints
ensure that the lower anchors are secure.
and adjust harnesses for every child, every
trip. • Always use the appropriate child restraints
and adjust the harnesses for every child,
• Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
every trip.
do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system. • Make sure that a child falls into the correct
weight range for the seat.
• Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats or harnesses that show signs • Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
of wear. do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system.
• Ensure that you have removed all slack
from the adult seat belt. • Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats and harnesses that show
• No child seat is completely child-proof.
signs of wear.
Encourage a child not to play with the
buckle or harness. • No child seat is completely child-proof.
Encourage children not to play with the
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
buckle or harness.
vehicle.
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
• Activate the rear door child safety locks,
vehicle.
see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 52.
• Activate the rear door child safety locks,
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 52.
from the side where there is traffic.
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
• Set children a good example - always wear
from the side where there is traffic.
your seat belt.
• Set children a good example - always wear
your seat belt.

71
L

Supplementary Restraint Systems


Supplementary Restraint Systems

2 4 3

LAN0152G 3

WARNING WARNING
The air bag is a supplementary restraint The air bag module inflates with considerable
system that provides ADDITIONAL protection speed and force. For your safety:
in a severe impact only - it does NOT replace An inflating air bag can cause facial
the need to wear a seat belt. To reduce the abrasions and other injuries. The injurious
risk of severe injury or death in the event of a effects of air bag inflation can be reduced, by
crash, all occupants in all seating positions, ensuring driver and passenger are seated
including the driver, should always wear their correctly, with the seat moved back as far as
seat belt, whether or not an air bag is present is practical, and the seat belts worn correctly.
at that seating position.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Ensure that a gap is maintained between the Administration (NHTSA) recommends a
side of the vehicle and the head and torso, to minimum distance of 10 inches (25 cm)
enable unobstructed inflation of the curtain between an occupant’s chest and the driver’s
and seat mounted side air bags.DO NOT lean air bag module.
out of the window.
NEVER attach accessory items to an air bag
module cover.
Both front seating positions are equipped with
knee bolsters to provide knee protection in
the event of an impact. DO NOT modify the
bolsters, or mount after market equipment on
or behind them.

72
R

Supplementary Restraint Systems


INTRODUCTION Air bag SRS warning indicator
The air bag supplementary restraint system A warning indicator mounted in
(SRS) incorporates front air bags 1 and 2, seat the instrument pack will alert you
mounted side air bags 3 and curtain air bags 4 to any malfunction of the air bag
for the driver and front passenger and curtain SRS. See Warning Indicators, 100. The air bag
air bags 4 for the rear seat outboard passengers SRS should always be checked by a Land Rover
(see illustration for air bag locations). These are Dealer if any of the following symptoms occurs:
indicated by the word AIR BAG on the trim. • The warning indicator fails to illuminate
Provided occupants are correctly seated, with when the starter switch is turned to
seat belts properly worn, the air bags will position ll.
provide additional protection to the chest and • The warning indicator fails to extinguish
facial areas of the front seat occupants in the within approximately four seconds after the
event of the vehicle receiving a severe frontal starter switch is turned to position ll.
impact, and also to the side of the body facing • The warning indicator illuminates after the
the impact, if a severe side collision occurs. engine is started, or while the vehicle is
In the event of a side collision or a roll-over, being driven.
curtain air bags will afford additional protection When the starter switch is turned to
to the side of the head facing the impact for the position II, the diagnostic control unit
front seat and outer rear seat occupants. monitors the readiness of the system’s
electrical circuits. The elements of the
system being monitored include:
• SRS warning indicator
• Rotary coupler
• Air bag modules
• Seat belt pre-tensioners
• Air bag diagnostic control unit
• Crash sensors
• Air bag wiring harnesses
• Seat occupancy sensor

73
L

Supplementary Restraint Systems


HOW THE AIR BAG SRS WORKS Dual stage deployment
In the event of a collision, the air bag control The front air bags deploy in two stages,
unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced depending on the severity of the frontal
by the collision, to determine whether the air collision. The unit monitors the rate of
bags should be deployed. deceleration during the impact.
Operation of the air bag SRS is dependent on In a moderately severe frontal impact, the air
the rate at which the vehicle's passenger bags inflate sufficiently to protect the front seat
compartment changes speed as a result of a passengers and reduce the risk of injury.
collision. The circumstances affecting different The driver’s seat has a seat position switch,
collisions (vehicle speed, angle of impact, type which governs the deployment of the driver’s
and size of object hit, for example), vary dual stage front air bag. The sensor detects the
considerably and will affect the rate of fore-aft position of the seat and selects the level
deceleration accordingly. of driver air bag deployment between a full
Note: The air bag SRS is not designed to energy deployment or a reduced energy
operate as a result of: deployment, if deployment is required.
• rear collisions. In a severe frontal impact, the air bags will fully
inflate thereby providing maximum protection
• minor front impacts.
unless the driver’s seat additional sensor
• minor side impacts. determines that a reduced power deployment is
• heavy braking. required.
• driving over bumps and potholes. Air bag inflation is virtually instantaneous and
However, if as a result of an impact, you believe occurs with considerable force, accompanied
the air bags should have deployed and they by a loud noise. The inflated bag, together with
failed to do so, please call 1(800)637-6837 for the seat belt restraint system, limit the
advice, or arrange for a Land Rover movement of an occupant, thereby reducing
representative to inspect the vehicle to the risk of injury to the head and upper torso.
determine whether the system operated In the case of a severe frontal collision, both
correctly. front air bags will be deployed. In the case of a
It follows, therefore, that significant superficial severe side collision, only the seat mounted
damage can occur without the air bags side air bags and curtain air bags on the
deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small impacted side of the vehicle will inflate.
amount of structural damage may cause the air However, there may also be impact conditions
bags to be deployed. whereby one set of side and both front air bags
deploy at the same time, or where front and
side air bags respond separately as a result of a
secondary impact occurring after the initial
collision has taken place.

74
R

Supplementary Restraint Systems


1 and 2. Front mounted air bags 3 and 4. Side and curtain air bags

WARNING
For the curtain air bags to deploy correctly,
the roof lining and A post trim must be
undamaged and fitted correctly. Any damage
or suspect fitting should be referred to a Land
Rover Dealer for examination.

LAN0155G

Note: Air bags will only deploy when they are


required to supplement the restraining force of
the front seat belts.

LAN0158G

Curtain air bags are designed to protect the


head in the event of a severe side impact or
roll-over event. They will NOT inflate as a result
of frontal or rear impacts alone.
The curtain air bag modules are located behind
the roof lining and pillar finisher, above the
doors. In the event of a severe side collision, the
air bag pushes out from behind the roof lining
and pillar finisher as it inflates. The curtain air
bag remains inflated for longer than the other
air bags, to provide additional head protection
in the event of a secondary impact/vehicle
roll-over.

75
L

Supplementary Restraint Systems


Deployment effects Obstruction of air bags

WARNING WARNING
When an air bag inflates, a fine powder is Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
released. This is not an indication of a operation of the air bags by placing feet,
malfunction. However, the powder may cause knees or any other part of the person, or any
irritation to the skin and should be thoroughly other objects in contact with, or in close
flushed from the eyes and any cuts or proximity to, an air bag module.
abrasions of the skin. DO NOT attach or position items on, or close
Activation of an air bag creates dust, causing to the roof lining, A, B and C post finishers,
possible breathing difficulties for asthma front seat backs or to an air bag cover, which
sufferers or other people with respiratory could interfere with the inflation of the air bag
problems. If an air bag is activated, any or, if the air bag inflates, be propelled inside
occupant who suffers from breathing the vehicle causing injury to the occupants.
difficulties should either leave the vehicle as
quickly as possible, or obtain fresh air by fully To ensure correct deployment of the air bags, it
opening the windows and doors. is essential that obstructions are not allowed to
Following inflation, some air bag SRS intervene between an air bag and the occupant.
components are hot - DO NOT touch until they The following are examples of the type of
have cooled. obstructions that could either, impede correct
operation of the air bags, or jeopardise personal
After inflation, the front and seat mounted side safety in the event of an air bag deployment:
air bags deflate immediately (curtain air bags
deflate slowly). This provides a gradual A B C
cushioning effect for the occupant and also
ensures that the driver's forward vision is not
obscured.

WARNING
Even with air bag SRS equipment fitted, seat
belts must ALWAYS be worn because:
• An air bag will only provide additional
protection in certain types of frontal LAN0588G
collisions. NO protection is afforded
against the effects of rear impacts, or • Accessories attached to or obscuring an air
minor frontal impacts. bag cover, including; the roof lining, A, B
• Inflation and deflation take place and C post finishers and the seat backs of
instantaneously and will not provide the front seats.
protection against the effects of • Items of hand luggage, or other objects
secondary impacts that can occur during placed on an air bag cover.
multiple vehicle collisions.

76
R

Supplementary Restraint Systems


• Feet, knees or any other part of the Occupant detection
anatomy in contact with, or in close The front passenger seat is fitted with an
proximity to, an air bag cover. occupancy detection system that determines if
• Head, arms or any part of the anatomy in the seat is unoccupied, occupied by a person of
contact with, or in close proximity to, a seat low weight, a child seat or object, or is occupied
mounted side air bag. by a heavier person or object.
• Items of clothing hanging from the grab The system consists of:
handle attached to the roof. • A weight sensing pressure pad installed
• Items of clothing or cushions draped over under the front passenger seat cushion.
the part of the front seat containing the air The sensor measures downwards
bag. pressure/weight on the seat cushion.
• Non-approved seat covers/accessory seat • A seat belt tension sensor integrated into
covers over a front seat; in particular, seat the anchor point of the front passenger
covers that have not been designed for use seat belt.
with side air bag. If in doubt, consult your • A control unit installed under the front
Land Rover Dealer. passenger seat.
Caution: If a non-approved phone system is to • An air bag status indicator lamp, mounted
be fitted, ensure that the installer is aware of on the instrument panel.
the SRS system.
The system will adjust the passenger air bag
Note: Unauthorised modification of the vehicle status and operate the status indicator as
or parts may invalidate the vehicle’s warranty. follows:
Disability modifications
Occupants with disabilities that may require the Seat Passenger Status
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land occupancy air bag indicator
Rover Dealer before any modifications are status status active
made. Completely Deactivated No†
empty
Low weight Deactivated Yes
occupant/
child seat/
object
Heavy Activated No
occupant/
object

The operational status indicator is located on


the passenger’s side of the instrument panel.

77
L

Supplementary Restraint Systems



It is possible to receive an intermittent Operational status indicator
indicator with an empty seat condition. This is
part of the system’s adaptive behaviour, and WARNING
does not affect the status of the passenger air When checking the status of the air bag using
bag. However, if the indicator becomes the operational status lamp, always ensure
permanently illuminated when the seat is that the starter key is in position ll.
definitely empty, or when an adult occupant is
seated then contact your Land Rover Dealer
immediately.

WARNING PASS
Do not use a child restraint on a seat AIRBAG
OFF
protected by an operational air bag in front of
it.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when LAN0160N 6CD-465

the air bag deploys.


The passenger air bag operational status
The safest place for children is properly indicator is an oblong lamp which illuminates
restrained in the rear seats. yellow when the passenger air bag is
deactivated.
The indicator will illuminate when the starter
key is turned to position ll and the air bag is
deactivated.

78
R

Supplementary Restraint Systems


SERVICE INFORMATION In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover
Dealer if:
WARNING • an air bag inflates.
DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
modify or tamper with any part of the air bag • the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
SRS, or wiring in the vicinity of an air bag SRS even if the air bag has not inflated.
component; this could cause the system to • any part of an air bag module cover shows
activate, resulting in personal injury. signs of cracking or damage.
• any trim containing air bags - front seat
WARNING back, headlining or pillar trims - becomes
For your safety it is recommended that you damaged.
seek the assistance of a Land Rover Dealer to
carry out any of the following:
• Removal or repair of any wiring or
component in the vicinity of any of the
SRS components, including the steering
wheel, steering column, door trim, roof
lining, instrument pack and instrument
panel.
• Installation of electronic equipment such
as a mobile phone, two-way radio or
in-car entertainment system.
• Modification to the front or side of the
vehicle, including the bumper and
chassis.
• Attachment of accessories to the front or
side of the vehicle.

Caution: The components that make up the air


bag SRS are sensitive to electrical or physical
interference, either of which could easily
damage the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the air bag.

79
L

Steering Column
Steering Column

STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT The steering wheel position can be adjusted in


two directions.
WARNING Move the lever located under the steering wheel
DO NOT adjust the steering wheel position fully downwards (see inset).
while the vehicle is in motion. This is
extremely dangerous! Adjust the steering wheel up or down, in or out.

Ensure that the lever is fully up. Inadvertent Move the lever fully up to lock.
movement of the wheel might occur if the
lever is not fully tightened.

LAN0168G

80
R

Door Mirrors
Door Mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Caution: Objects viewed in exterior mirrors
may appear further away than they actually
are.
Mirror adjustment

LAN0170G

The door mirrors have integral heating


elements which disperse ice or mist from the
glass. These will operate automatically with the
starter switch in position II and are controlled
according to the external temperature and
wiper status.
Note: Up to three exterior mirror positions for
each of three possible remote controls can be
stored. See DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY, 58.

H6044L

With the starter switch turned to position l or II,


rotate the knob to select either the left or
right-hand mirror. Push the knob in the
appropriate direction to tilt the mirror glass
up/down/left or right

81
L

Door Mirrors
Folding the mirror body Reverse mirror dipping
The door mirrors are designed to fold forwards Vehicles with driver’s seat memory have a
or rearwards on impact. They can also be folded pre-stored function, which allows the door
in towards the side windows into a park mirrors to dip whenever reverse gear is
position.This operation is carried out by selected, giving the driver a view of the
physically pushing the mirror bodies towards curbside.
the side windows. When this feature is first turned on, the mirrors
will dip to a preset amount. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 86. The degree of dipping
can be programmed using the following
sequence:
1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
I or ll. Do not start the engine.
2. Adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors to
the correct position and perform a
memory-store routine.
See Setting the memory pre-sets, 58.
LAN0171G
3. Select reverse gear - the mirrors will dip to
a preset level.
4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped
position.
5. Perform a memory-store sequence.
6. Within 5 seconds, press the pre-set button
you previously stored the seat and mirror
positions on.
7. DOOR MIRROR DIP STORED will be
displayed on the message center.
8. A single chime will sound from the
instrument pack.
This feature can be enabled or disabled
by a Land Rover Dealer or by the driver.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION,
86.

82
R

Instruments
Instruments

INSTRUMENT PACK

1 2 3 4

EXT 72 F

LAN0174N 9 8 7 6 5

1. Tachometer
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (x 1000). In normal driving conditions
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2000
and 3000 rev/min.
2. Temperature gauge
At normal operating temperature, the pointer
will be positioned midway between the RED and
BLUE segments of the gauge (the precise
position will vary according to climatic
LAN0731N
conditions).
If the pointer moves above the mid point, the Idle the engine and allow to cool down until the
engine coolant is becoming too hot. Should the temperature gauge recovers. If the problem
pointer move INTO the RED segment and the persists, seek qualified assistance before
RED warning indicator within the gauge continuing.
illuminates, severe engine damage could occur Note: If the engine is in danger of overheating,
. the air conditioning may switch off and engine
performance may reduce, in order to minimise
engine load.

83
L

Instruments
3. Fuel gauge 7. Gear selector position display
Caution: NEVER allow vehicles to run out of The current gear selector position is displayed.
fuel as the resultant misfire may damage the See GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY, 98, for further
catalytic converter. information.
When the starter switch is turned to position II, 8. Main message center
the pointer quickly rises to show the level of fuel Displays all warning and information
in the tank. messages. For further information concerning
messages and their meanings, refer to MAIN
MESSAGE CENTER, 88.
9. Tachometer indicators panel
Displays four system status indicators.

LAN0733N

When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of


12 litres (3 gallons) on petrol vehicles, the
AMBER low fuel warning indicator in the fuel
gauge illuminates.
The remaining fuel should give a range of
approximately 80 km (50 miles).
The small arrow visible alongside the fuel pump
symbol on the gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle on which the fuel filler is located - a
useful reminder to help you position the vehicle
on the correct side of the gasoline pumps
before refuelling.
4. Speedometer
Indicates road speed.
5. Total distance (odometer) and trip recorder
Indicates the total distance travelled, and also
shows the most recent individual journey
distance. See ODOMETER DISPLAY, 99.
6. Trip recorder reset switch
With the starter switch in position ll, pressing
this button resets the trip recorder to zero.

84
R

Trip Computer
Trip Computer

TRIP COMPUTER - A series of short presses of the button (less


FUNCTION SELECTION than two seconds) will scroll through the
following:

RANGE 246 MILES


EXT 73 F
AV.
FUEL 17.4 MPG
TRIP 134.5 MILES
AV.
SPEED 45 MPH
OVERSPEED WARNING
65 MPH

EXT 72 F
LAN0179N

The trip computer function can be set to give a TRIP 134.5 MILES
wide range of information, with the units used
by the displays being chosen by the driver. LAN0182N

The system is also used to display any warning • Available range (with current fuel tank
messages generated by the vehicle’s contents).
self-checking facility.
• Average fuel consumption.
At engine start-up, the main message center
• Average speed.
shows SYSTEM CHECK IN PROGRESS. When
this check is completed, the screen will show • The option to activate/de-activate the
the outside temperature. If the vehicle is in overspeed warning function (a long press
motion, the screen will also show the trip of the button turns the function on or off).
distance, using the last used units. • A review of active warning messages.
Trip computer statistics can be viewed by • A blank trip computer window (screen
pressing the i button on the end of the shows outside temperature).
direction/turn indicator stalk. • Settings option menu.
A long press of the button (over two seconds) • A display of trip distance.
will zero the trip distance recorder which will
then start to record distance from that point. • Time display.

85
L

Settings Option
Settings Option

SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION With the starter key in any position, but with the
Various vehicle functions can be selected to vehicle stationary and a blank screen displayed,
suit personal requirements. These can be set by a short press (less than two seconds) on the i
the driver. (information) button on the end of the
direction/turn indicator stalk brings up the
SETTINGS display.
Once this screen is displayed, pressing button
SETTINGS 1 gives access to the menu of options that can
be personalised.
ENTER
EXIT Move through the Settings menu by pressing
buttons 1 or 2, and make choices by pressing
buttons 3 or 4.
3 When you have finished making adjustments, a
4 short press (less than two seconds) on the i
button will return you to the trip computer
1 display.
2

TRIP DISTANCE
UNITS
KM
NEXT
EXIT BACK

LAN0183G

86
R

Settings Option

SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
oC or oF
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING Off
(Set a personal speed limit - Warnings are 20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
displayed in the message center) (Units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP† ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO

†This
feature is dependent on having driver’s Key memory
seat memory. All of the choices made during Settings are
Confirming choices stored within the vehicles memory. The choices
are referenced to the remote control that was
After making any changes to the Settings
used during the process.
options, press the i button again to save
settings and exit. These choices are recalled when the vehicle is
next unlocked using that remote control.
Note: If the vehicle is moved while any changes
are being made to the Settings options, the
system will prevent any further input until the
vehicle is stationary again.

87
L

Message Center
Message Center

MAIN MESSAGE CENTER All Warning messages are displayed for


approximately 4 seconds, after which the
symbol is displayed in the main message
center for as long as the message exists.
Review the messages by pressing the i button
on the direction/turn indicator stalk until the list
LOW WASHER FLUID of messages appears. The message center will
then automatically cycle through the messages,
until the i button is pressed again.
LAN0186G
Information messages
Driver warning and information messages are Information messages will be displayed as and
displayed in the main message center. when applicable, and also when the starter
They are displayed when a fault is detected and switch is turned on or off. Where the message
also when the starter switch is turned off. It is requires action by the driver - TAKE
possible, by pressing the i button on the CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
direction indicator stalk, to view messages for Messages are displayed in order of importance
up to 3 minutes after the key has been removed with critical warnings taking priority.
from the starter switch.
Languages
Messages have different priority levels and are
grouped into the following categories: The language displayed in the main message
center is a dealer configurable feature.
Critical warning messages The languages supported are:
Critical warning messages are accompanied by • English
an audible warning and may have the handbook
• English US
symbol next to it.
• French
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE
CORRECTIVE ACTION IMMEDIATELY! • German
• Italian
Warning messages
Warning messages are non-critical, but must • Spanish
be treated with some urgency. They will also be If your vehicle has the navigation option, the
accompanied by an audible warning each time language you select for navigation display will
the message is displayed. also be displayed in the main message center if
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE it is one of the supported languages in the
CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. above list. If the main message center does not
support the selected navigation language,
English will be displayed.

88
R

Message Center
MESSAGE CENTER - MESSAGES
The following table is a comprehensive list of all messages that could appear in the message center.
Market criteria mean that some messages will not apply to your vehicle and will therefore not appear.

Message Meaning What to do?


The icon appears in There are current warning Press the i button on the end of
the display messages waiting to be the direction/turn indicator stalk
reviewed. to view the list of messages.
AIRBAG FAULT Fault in supplementary Seek qualified assistance
restraint system. immediately.
CANNOT EDIT Driver has attempted to access Stop the vehicle before entering
ON THE MOVE the Settings menu when the Settings menu.
vehicle is moving.
CAUTION Parkbrake has been applied Only use this function in an
PARKBRAKE while the vehicle is moving. emergency.
APPLIED
CAUTION! Displayed when the Terrain Raise suspension manually to
RISK OF Response system would off-road height if possible and
GROUNDING WITH normally have provided appropriate.
SUSPENSION AT off-road height but the driver
NORMAL HEIGHT has manually lowered the
vehicle (or the system cannot
raise the vehicle).
CHECK ALL Advisory message, pressure in Check tire pressures.
TIRE a running tire decreased to first
PRESSURES warning threshold.
CHECK Brake fluid in reservoir below Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE FLUID recommended level. immediately.
CHECK Brake pads worn beyond the Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE PADS service limit. immediately.
CHECK Pressure in spare tire Check pressure of spare tire.
SPARE TIRE decreased to warning
PRESSURE threshold.
COOLING SYSTEM Low coolant level Stop the vehicle and check level.
FAULT Top up with engine coolant. If the
MONITOR GAUGE problem persists, seek qualified
assistance.
CRUISE Driver has switched off cruise No action required.
CANCELLED control.

89
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
DRIVER Driver is pressing the Nothing, message will clear when
OVERIDE accelerator pedal during cruise the driver releases the
control. accelerator, then cruise control
will resume.
CRUISE System not available due to Consult your Land Rover Dealer.
NOT AVAILABLE system fault.
CRUISE CONTROL System fault or vehicle Consult cruise control section of
NOT PERMITTED operating parameters outside handbook for guidance.
threshold for operation of
cruise control.
SET SPEED Speed set for Adaptive Cruise No action required.
XXX MPH KM/H Control.
CRUISE GAP Adaptive Cruise Control set Adjust to required distance.
<--> distance (time gap). (4 settings).
ACC SENSOR Adaptive Cruise Control field of Check to make sure nothing is
BLOCKED view may be obstructed. covering the ACC sensor.
FWD ALERT Forward alert feature has been No action required.
ON (or OFF) turned on or off.
FWD ALERT Forward alert sensitivity Adjust to required sensitivity.
<----> adjustment. (4 settings).
DOOR MIRROR DIP Memory system - confirmation No action required.
STORED that memory has stored driver
information.
DRIVER Alert that action by the driver to If required, the driver should
INTERVENE apply the brakes is required. apply the brakes.
DRIVER’S Driver’s door open or not fully Close driver’s door.
DOOR OPEN closed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control To reselect, press DSC switch.
SWITCHED OFF system not available - switched
off by driver.
ENGINE SYSTEM FAULT Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
registers a serious fault - your Land Rover Dealer.
reduced performance may be
experienced.
ENGINE SYSTEM The relevant service interval Arrange as soon as possible.
SERVICE REQUIRED has elapsed and your vehicle
requires servicing.
FASTEN Seat occupied and seat belt not Fasten seat belt.
SEAT BELTS fastened.

90
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
GRASS GRAVEL If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
SNOW this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
GRASS GRAVEL The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
SNOW one position for longer than
PROGRAM SELECTED two seconds and Grass Gravel
Snow special program has
been activated.
HDC FAULT Hill Descent Control system Drive with care and do not
SYSTEM fault. attempt to descend steep slopes.
NOT AVAILABLE Seek qualified assistance
immediately.
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. HDC is required. In LOW range, HDC
IN THIS GEAR fully functional in 1, R and D in operates in all gears.
HIGH range. It operates in all
gears in LOW range.
HDC HDC unavailable, speed Reduce vehicle speed.
NOT AVAILABLE threshold exceeded. Max HDC
SPEED TOO HIGH operating speed is 50 km/h (30
mph), max speed for HDC
selection is 80 km/h (50 mph).
HDC HDC switched off by driver, No action required.
SWITCHED OFF Terrain Response system or
speed threshold exceeded.
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC switched off while brake Wait until message disappears
NOT AVAILABLE system is cooling. before attempting to descend
SYSTEM COOLING steep slopes.
HIGH ENGINE SPEED Engine idle speed increasing to No action required.
FOR COOLING improve cooling and/or air
conditioning performance.
HIGH/LOW RANGE Advises driver that transfer box No action required.
SELECTED has engaged either HIGH or
LOW range.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy lamps can only be No action required.
OFF operated manually, and will not
illuminate when a door is
opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS All courtesy lamps have been No action required.
AUTOMATIC enabled.

91
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
KEY BATTERY Remote control battery charge Insert key in starter switch and
LOW PLACE low. start the engine to recharge the
KEY IN IGNITION remote control battery.
TO CHARGE
LOW Coolant level in header tank Stop the vehicle and check level
COOLANT LEVEL below recommended level. in the header tank. Top up with
correct mixture of antifreeze and
water at the earliest opportunity.
If the problem persists, consult
your Land Rover Dealer.
LOW WASHER FLUID Washer fluid quantity below 1 Top up washer fluid.
litre.
MEMORY 1/2/3 Memory system - confirmation No action required.
STORED/SELECTED that memory has been
stored/selected.
MUD RUTS If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
MUD RUTS The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
PROGRAM SELECTED one position for longer than
two seconds and Mud Ruts
special program has been
activated.
PARKBRAKE A garage technician has If not required, an ignition reset
BEDDING CYCLE requested a bedding cycle. will cancel the function.
ACTIVE
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the yellow warning Seek qualified assistance
indicator - electric parkbrake immediately.
functions may not be available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Drive-away release function is Use manual release.
AUTO RELEASE not available.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the red warning Seek qualified assistance
SYSTEM indicator - electric parkbrake immediately.
NOT FUNCTIONAL functions are not available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parkbrake has lost Follow the instructions to park
TO HOLD VEHICLE vehicle speed information. the vehicle.
REMOVE KEY THEN
APPLY PARKBRAKE

92
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
PARKBRAKE OFF An emergency release Once original faults have been
LIFT SWITCH operation is detected. corrected, apply the switch to
TO APPLY reinstate electric parkbrake.
PARK LOCK Automatic transmission park Seek qualified assistance
FAILURE lock function ineffective due to immediately.
APPLY HANDBRAKE transfer box being out of HIGH
or LOW range.
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to achieve
AND PARKBRAKE detected without brake pedal a manual release.
SWITCH contact.
TO RELEASE
PROGRAM CHANGE Conditions prevail which make Be patient. If conditions change
IN PROGRESS it temporarily impossible to within 60 seconds, the chosen
select a new program. This can program will be activated.
be due to ABS or DSC activity If the message is prompted by
or the overheating of the electronic differential overheat,
electronic differentials. then it will take longer but there
will be separate advice about this.
Once the differentials have cooled
and this advice is no longer
present, try to reselect the
required special program.
RECOMMEND LOW range is usually better for Select LOW range if required.
LOW RANGE Mud-Ruts special program.
IS SELECTED
FOR MUD-RUTS
PROGRAM
RECOMMEND RAISING In deep ruts it is beneficial to Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO raise the vehicle to off-road off-road height.
OFF ROAD HEIGHT height. This is done
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS automatically in LOW range but
has to be done manually if
mud/ruts program is used in
HIGH range.
RECOMMEND STARTING For slippery conditions it can Select second/third gear.
IN be beneficial to start off in a
2ND/3RD GEAR higher gear than usual.
FOR SLIPPERY
CONDITIONS

93
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
REDUCED Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
ENGINE registers a serious fault - your Land Rover Dealer.
PERFORMANCE reduced engine performance
may be experienced.
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended Check if vehicle is clear of
HEIGHT IF CLEAR mode. obstacle. If clear, select required
OF OBSTACLE suspension.
ROCK CRAWL If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
ROCK CRAWL The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
PROGRAM SELECTED one position for longer than
two seconds and Rock Crawl
special program has been
activated.
SAND If you leave the rotary knob in No action required.
this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
SAND The rotary knob has been left in No action required.
PROGRAM SELECTED one position for longer than
two seconds and Sand special
program has been activated.
SELECT LOW RANGE Vehicle is not in LOW range, so Select LOW range if Rock Crawl is
TO ACTIVATE Rock Crawl cannot be required.
ROCK CRAWL activated.
SELECT NEUTRAL Alerts driver that range change Select neutral.
FOR RANGE will not occur until neutral is
CHANGE selected on the transmission.
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically Choose to slow down or accept
WILL LOWER/RAISE lower/raise if vehicle speed height change.
increases.
SPECIAL You have deselected a Terrain No action required.
PROGRAMS OFF Response special program and
the general program has now
been activated.
SPEED TOO HIGH Driver has requested range Reduce speed to 40 km/h
FOR RANGE change when vehicle speed is (25 mph).
CHANGE too high.

94
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
SUSPENSION Access height selected. No action required.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION Air suspension height change Close all doors.
CLOSE DOOR is prevented because a door is
TO CHANGE HEIGHT open.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
air suspension system. System immediately.
may still operate normally.
SUSPENSION FAULT A major fault has been detected Drive slowly until fault can be
MAX SPEED 50 KM/H in the air suspension system. rectified.
(MAX SPEED 30 MPH) Height cannot be controlled.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
NORMAL HEIGHT ONLY air suspension system. Only immediately.
normal height is available.
SUSPENSION FAULT Major component failure. Stop vehicle immediately and
STOP SAFELY seek qualified assistance.
STOP ENGINE
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Drive slowly and take additional
VEHICLE LEAN WHEN Dynamic Response system. care until fault can be fixed. Seek
CORNERING qualified assistance immediately.
SUSPENSION Vehicle body has become No action required.
IN EXTENDED trapped on an obstacle and will
MODE raise automatically.
SUSPENSION Crawl mode selected and No action required.
LOCKED AT suspension locked.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SUSPENSION Normal height selected. No action required.
NORMAL HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION A height change has been Reduce vehicle speed.
SPEED TOO HIGH requested but is prevented
TO CHANGE HEIGHT because speed is too high.
SUSPENSION Vehicle height can only be Start the engine.
START ENGINE raised with the engine running.
TO RAISE VEHICLE

95
L

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
SUSPENSION Vehicle is raising slowly No action required.
VEHICLE RAISING because reservoir is empty.
SLOWLY (Only displayed if lift time
exceeds 12 seconds. This is
NOT a system fault.)
SUSPENSION Air suspension compressor is Wait for suspension to carry out
WILL RAISE WHEN cooling. Lifting will resume lifting sequence.
SYSTEM COOLED when compressor has cooled.
SYSTEM CHECK Instrument cluster internal No action required.
IN PROGRESS diagnostic routine.
SYSTEM FAULT Some Terrain Response special Be careful going off-road as
SOME PROGRAMS programs are not available Terrain Response may not
NOT AVAILABLE because of a system fault. function in the program
required.Seek qualified
assistance immediately.
SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the vehicle Be careful going off-road as
SPECIAL PROGRAMS which makes the Terrain Terrain Response cannot
NOT AVAILABLE Response special programs function in any of its special
unavailable. programs.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
TERRAIN RESPONSE If you leave the Terrain No action required.
SPECIAL PROGRAMS OFF Response rotary knob in this
position, you will activate the
general program and any active
Terrain Response special
program will be deselected.
TRAILER CONNECTED Advisory message that vehicle If a trailer is connected, do
OFF ROAD HEIGHT has not selected off-road height nothing, as it may not be safe to
NOT SELECTED as trailer socket is being used. raise the vehicle to off-road
AUTOMATICALLY height.
If no trailer is connected
electrically but something else is,
such as a bike rack, then the
vehicle can be raised to off-road
height manually.
If nothing is connected, then the
socket needs checking for faults.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT transmission has a fault. immediately.

96
R

Message Center
Message Meaning What to do?
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that an Seek qualified assistance
FAULT AND automatic transmission fault immediately.
OVERHEAT has occurred and the
temperature is too high.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT LIMITED transmission has a fault and immediately.
GEARS AVAILABLE performance may be affected.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
FAULT occurred with the electronic safe to do so.
STOP SAFELY rear differential.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
FAULT occurred with the transfer box assistance immediately.
TRACTION REDUCED control system. Note: Off-road performance will
be reduced.
TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature Reduce speed and seek qualified
OVERHEAT has reached or is approaching assistance immediately.
SLOW DOWN the overheat threshold.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
RANGE CHANGE occurred which prevents the assistance immediately.
NOT AVAILABLE transfer box from changing
range.
TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module Reduce speed and seek qualified
TRACTION fault. assistance immediately.
REDUCED
TIRE PRESSURE NOT Possible loss of RF Seek assistance immediately.
MONITORED transmission or defective
sensor battery.
TIRE PRESSURE TOO Pressure in a running tire too Adjust to correct pressure as
HIGH high, threshold reached. soon as possible.
TIRE PRESSURE VERY Pressure in a running tire Adjust to correct pressure as
LOW decreased to warning soon as possible.
threshold.
TIRE PRESSURE TPM system fault has Seek qualified assistance
MONITORING SYSTEM occurred. immediately.
FAULT
TIRE PRESSURES TOO Adjust to correct pressure as
HIGH soon as possible.
TIRE PRESSURES VERY Adjust to correct pressure as
LOW soon as possible.

97
L

Message Center
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY

LAN0187G LAN0188G

The service interval indicator is a market This shows the current gear lever position and
configurable feature and may not be enabled. If indicates when SPORT range has been
the feature is enabled, the display will become selected.
active when a pre-determined distance or time
before service is reached. These
pre-determined values are market dependent.
When the starter switch is turned to position I
and the pre-determined value is reached, a
distance countdown to the next service appears
in the display. A minus sign preceding the
distance indicates that the service interval point
has been exceeded by that distance.
After approximately five seconds, the display
reverts to show the total distance travelled.
Note: After the completion of each service, the
Land Rover Dealer will reset the distance
display for the countdown to the next service.

98
R

Message Center
ODOMETER DISPLAY

H6572R

With the starter switch turned to position II, the


display indicates the total distance travelled by
the vehicle, and also shows the most recent
individual journey distance. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 86. Pressing the trip
recorder reset button (see inset), resets the trip
recorder to zero.

99
L

Warning Indicators
Warning Indicators

INDICATOR GROUPING

LAN0191N

Caution: RED warning indicators are of BACKGROUND


particular importance; their illumination Direction/turn indicators - GREEN
indicates that a fault exists. If a RED warning An indicator flashes in time with
indicator illuminates, stop the vehicle safely the corresponding left or right
and review the specific instructions given in direction/turn indicator lamps
this section. whenever they are operated. If the warning
The location and specification of the warning indicator fails to flash, or flashes very rapidly,
indicators may vary according to model and this may indicate a bulb failure in one of the
market requirements. direction/turn indicator lamps.
For ease of identification, the warning indicator If the hazard switch is pressed, both warning
descriptions have been grouped into the five indicators will flash in conjunction with the
locations on the instrument pack. direction/turn indicator lamps.
These are: Side lamps/Headlamps - GREEN
• background The indicator illuminates when the
• tachometer side lamps or headlamps are
• fuel/temperature gauge turned on.
• message center Trailer - GREEN
• speedometer The indicator illuminates as a bulb
check when the starter switch is
turned to position II and
extinguishes when the engine is started.

100
R

Warning Indicators
If a trailer is attached to the vehicle and the Air bag SRS - RED
direction/turn indicators are used, this indicator The indicator illuminates when the
will flash in synchronisation with the starter switch is turned to position
direction/turn indicator lamps. If it does not II and extinguishes after about 4
flash, this indicates that a trailer bulb is seconds. If the indicator illuminates at any
defective. other time, there is a fault with the system -
seek qualified assistance urgently.
TACHOMETER DISPLAY
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) active - AMBER
Battery charging - RED
Illuminates when Adaptive Cruise
Illuminates as a bulb check when
Control detects a vehicle in front
the starter switch is turned to
and will react to it.
position II and extinguishes once
the engine is running. If it remains on, or
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the
battery charging system is indicated. Seek
qualified assistance urgently.
Low oil pressure - RED
Illuminates as a bulb check when
the starter switch is turned to
position II and extinguishes when
the engine is started. If the indicator remains
on, flashes on and off, or illuminates whilst
driving, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
IMMEDIATELY. Seek qualified assistance
before driving. Always check the oil level when
this indicator illuminates.
Seat belt - RED
Illuminates when the starter
switch is turned to position II and
extinguishes after approximately 6
seconds, even if the driver's seat belt remains
unfastened. In some markets illumination of the
indicator will be accompanied by a warning
chime. See AUDIBLE WARNINGS, 106.
Note: In certain markets, the indicator will
illuminate until the driver’s seat belt is fastened
correctly.

101
L

Warning Indicators
Suspension- AMBER/RED This indicates an air suspension fault, with the
This lamp is shared between the system not being able to control ride height. In
Air suspension system and which case the maximum speed indicated
Dynamic Response. should not be exceeded until the fault has been
rectified.
The lamp illuminates both RED and AMBER
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch • If the lamp shows AMBER (constant
is turned to position II. illumination): This indicates a system fault
that will result in reduced Dynamic
If illumination occurs whilst driving, a fault with
Response performance but will not leave
one of the systems is indicated, as follows:
the vehicle in a dangerous condition. You
• If the lamp shows RED (a flashing red lamp may continue driving, but reduce speed,
which changes to constant illumination take additional care, and consult a Land
after two minutes, and is accompanied by a Rover Dealer at the earliest opportunity.
warning chime): This indicates a system The ride quality of the vehicle may be
fault that may result in serious damage to reduced in this condition.
vehicle components and reduced Dynamic
The following message will be displayed in the
Response performance. Stop the vehicle as
message center window to accompany an
soon as safety permits and switch off the
amber warning lamp:
engine. DO NOT CONTINUE DRIVING! Seek
qualified assistance immediately. SUSPENSION FAULT, VEHICLE LEAN, WHEN
CORNERING.
The following message will be displayed in the
message center window to accompany a red If the following message is displayed in the
warning lamp for a dynamic response system message center:
failure: SUSPENSION FAULT, NORMAL HEIGHT
SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP SAFELY, STOP ONLY.
ENGINE. This indicates an air suspension fault, but the
If the following message is displayed in the vehicle can still be driven normally.
message center: LOW gear- GREEN
SUSPENSION FAULT, MAX SPEED 50KPH Illuminates when LOW range has
(MAX SPEED 30MPH) been selected; flashes during
range change.

102
R

Warning Indicators
Hill Descent Control (HDC) information - FUEL/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
GREEN DISPLAY
Illuminates briefly as a bulb and
system check when the starter Headlamp high beam - BLUE
switch is turned to position II and Illuminates when the headlamps
also illuminates when HDC is selected. are switched to high beam or
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions headlamps are flashed.
are met, the indicator will illuminate TPMS operation
continuously. The tire pressure warning
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions comprises a yellow warning
are not met (vehicle in neutral gear and vehicle indicator (telltale) within the
speed above HDC operating range) the instrument pack and an associated message
indicator will flash. within the message center.
If a fault with the HDC system occurs, HDC will Brake systems (U.S. only)
fade-out and then deselect, or deselect
This indicator shares its position
immediately (depending on the type of fault and
and symbol with four brake
whether or not HDC is in operation). The green
system warnings and illuminates
indicator will extinguish and the message
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in the
is turned to position II (the indicator will
message center.
illuminate red and amber during bulb check).
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) and
Brake systems (Canada only)
Electronic Traction Control (ETC) - AMBER
This indicator shares its position
Illuminates briefly as a bulb check
and symbol with four brake
when the starter switch is turned
system warnings and illuminates
to position II. The indicator also
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
illuminates when DSC is switched off.
is turned to position II (the indicator will
Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
illuminate red and amber during bulb check).
control.
The indicator will flash while DSC and/or ETC is Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) - AMBER
activated and will remain flashing until the If the indicator remains amber after starting, or
system is no longer active. illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the EBA
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does system is indicated. Drive with care and seek
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed, qualified assistance urgently.
a fault has been detected in the system and DSC Brake pad wear - AMBER
and/or ETC will be inactive - drive with care and
It illuminates when brake pad wear has reached
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.
a predetermined limit. Drive with care and seek
qualified assistance urgently.

103
L

Warning Indicators
Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) - SPEEDOMETER
RED
Cruise control active - AMBER
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator. Illuminates when cruise control is
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being operating.
driven, stop the vehicle gently, as soon as Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) -
safety permits, check and top up brake fluid if AMBER
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
Illuminates when a fault occurs
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
with the Adaptive Front lighting
Brake fluid level - RED System. Seek qualified assistance
Low brake fluid level is indicated by illumination urgently.
of the red brake warning indicator. If this Check engine - AMBER
illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
Illuminates as a bulb and system
stop the vehicle gently, as soon as safety
check when the starter switch is
permits. Check and top up brake fluid if
turned on and extinguishes as
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
soon as the engine is started. Illumination at
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
any other time indicates an engine fault. If the
Have the problem checked by your Land Rover
indicator illuminates continuously while
Dealer.
driving, the emission performance of the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) - AMBER engine management system is impaired - seek
Illuminates as a bulb check when qualified assistance.
the starter switch is turned to If the indicator flashes while driving,
position II. If the indicator remains immediately reduce engine power to avoid
on or illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the catalytic converter damage.
ABS system is indicated. Drive with care,
Parkbrake system - RED or AMBER (U.S. only)
avoiding heavy brake application, and seek
qualified assistance urgently. Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
a bulb check when the starter
switch is turned to position ll.
If an indicator flashes red or illuminates yellow,
a fault with the parkbrake system is indicated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
without reliance on the parkbrake.
Parkbrake system - RED or AMBER
(Canada only)
Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
a bulb check when the starter
switch is turned to position ll.

104
R

Warning Indicators
If an indicator flashes red or illuminates yellow,
a fault with the parkbrake system is indicated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
without reliance on the parkbrake.
Front fog lamps - GREEN
Illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamps - AMBER
Illuminates when the rear fog
lamps are switched on.

105
L

Audible Warnings
Audible Warnings

AUDIBLE WARNINGS Adaptive Cruise Control


The market specification will determine which A warning chime will sound:
of the following audible warnings are • When the driver must intervene and take
appropriate to your vehicle. control.
Electronic air suspension warnings Electric parkbrake
A warning chime will sound: A warning chime will sound:
• If changes to or from off-road height are • If the driver selects electric parkbrake
requested but not permitted. whilst the vehicle is moving.
• Whenever the speed threshold for the Starter key reminder
current ride height is reached.
A warning will chime continuously:
• Whenever the air suspension is lowered to
• If the key is left in the starter switch while
crawl mode.
the driver's door is open. The chime stops
Dynamic Response warning as soon as the door is closed or the key is
A warning chime will sound: removed from the starter switch.
• If a fault with the Dynamic Response Seat belt reminder
system is detected. The chime will coincide In some markets, a warning chime will sound
with the suspension warning lamp flashing (one second frequency):
RED then illuminating continuously after 2
• If the driver's seat belt has not been
minutes, with the following message in the
fastened when the starter switch is turned
message center; SUSPENSION FAULT,
on. The chime operates in conjunction with
STOP SAFELY, STOP ENGINE. This
the seat belt warning indicator and sounds
indicates a system fault that may result in
for 6 seconds, or until the seat belt is
serious damage to vehicle components and
fastened (whichever occurs first).
reduced Dynamic Response performance.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits If the seat belt remains unfastened, the chime
and switch off the engine. DO NOT will sound at intervals of 15 seconds.
CONTINUE DRIVING! Seek qualified Tire Pressure Monitoring System warnings
assistance immediately.
A warning chime will sound:
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning • Whenever the tire pressures are very low in
A warning chime will sound once: one or more tires.
• If a fault with the DSC system is detected, • Whenever the vehicle speed increases from
and the appropriate warning indicator(s) 0 to 60 km/h (38 mph) with more than one
illuminates (DSC, ABS, Amber Brake tire very low.
Warning or HDC fault or text message). The • Whenever a Tire Pressure Monitoring
vehicle may still be driven with care, but System or wheel sensor fault is detected.
seek qualified assistance at the earliest
opportunity.

106
R

Lamps and Indicators


Lamps and Indicators

EXTERIOR LAMPS Automatic control lamps


With the rotary master switch in position 4 and
Lamps master switch
starter switch in position II, the side lamps, low
beam headlamps and license plate lamps will
3 4 illuminate automatically when the ambient light
1 2 falls below a pre-defined level.
All of the lamps will go out when the ambient
light rises above that level.
AUTO
High beam

5
6

LAN0403G

1. Side lamps and headlamps off. LAN0194G


2. Side lamps on.
With the lamps master switch in position 3 and
3. Low beam headlamps on. starter switch in position ll, push the left-hand
4. Automatic control lamps on. steering column lever away from the steering
5. Front fog lamps on. wheel as far as it will go to select high beam,
and release it.
6. Front and rear fog lamps on.
To cancel high beam, pull the lever towards the
Note: Fog lamps cannot be operated if the
steering wheel and release it.
lamps master switch is at position 4 Auto.
While high beam is selected, a blue indicator
Side lamps will be illuminated in the instrument pack.
The front and rear side lamps, along with
Headlamp high beam flash
license plate and marker lamps, illuminate
when the lamps master switch is turned to To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the
positions 2 or 3, regardless of the position of lever towards the steering wheel and release it.
the starter switch. The blue indicator in the instrument pack
illuminates when the headlamps are flashed.

107
L

Lamps and Indicators


Dimmer control Daytime running lamps
With the engine running and the main lighting
switch turned off, the front and rear side lamps,
the license plate lamps and the low beam
headlamps will illuminate. The instrument pack
AUTO
illumination remains off.
Unless they are required or prohibited
by law, daytime running lamps can be
disabled/enabled by a Land Rover
Dealer.
Note: The following lamps operate only with
LAN0195G
the starter switch in position ll.
Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of
Stop lamps
instrument pack illumination.
The stop lamps will illuminate when the brake
Headlamp courtesy delay pedal is pressed and will remain on while the
As a driver convenience feature the headlamps brake pedal is pressed.
and reverse lamps will illuminate for a short The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill
time after the vehicle is parked. Turn the starter Descent Control is braking the vehicle or during
switch off with the headlamps still switched on. Electronic Parkbrake dynamic deceleration.
The lamps master switch can be in positions 2,
or 3. Reverse lamps
Remove the key from the starter switch and Selection of reverse gear will operate the
turn lamps master switch fully reverse lamps.
counter-clockwise to the Off position. The Front fog lamps
headlamps and reverse lamps will remain
illuminated for up to 240 seconds. This WARNING
automatic time delay is configurable (see Fog lamps should ONLY be used when
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 86). visibility is severely restricted - as soon as
The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any conditions clear, switch off fog lamps to
time by turning the starter switch to position l prevent dazzling of other road users.
or II or the lamps master switch from position
1 to 2. With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
3, pull out the switch to position 5 to operate
Note: If Automatic Control Lamps are switched the front fog lamps. An indicator will illuminate
on, the headlamp courtesy delay will operate in the instrument pack.
automatically.
Headlamp courtesy delay can be Rear fog lamps
enabled or disabled by a Land Rover With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
Dealer or by the driver. See SELECTING 3, pull out the switch to its fully extended detent
SETTINGS OPTION, 86. position 6. An indicator will illuminate in the
instrument pack.

108
R

Lamps and Indicators


HAZARD WARNING LAMPS DIRECTION/TURN INDICATORS

2
LAN0196G 3

Press the switch to operate the hazard warning


lamps. All of the direction/turn indicator lamps
(including the instrument pack warning
indicators and those fitted to a trailer) will flash
together. LAN0197G

Use ONLY in an emergency to warn other road With the starter switch in position II, the
users when your stationary vehicle is causing left-hand steering column lever will operate the
an obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation. direction/turn indicators (a GREEN warning
Remember to switch off before moving away. indicator on the instrument pack will flash in
time with the direction/turn indicators).
Note: Bulb failure of any front or rear
direction/turn indicator lamp (not side
repeaters) will cause the instrument pack
warning indicator to flash rapidly.
Lane change flash
Move the lever partially up or down against
spring pressure then release, to indicate a lane
change. The relevant direction/turn indicator
flashes three times.
If the lever is held against spring pressure, the
direction/turn indicators will continue to
operate until the lever is released.
Lane change flash can be
disabled/enabled by a Land Rover
Dealer.

109
L

Wipers and Washers


Wipers and Washers

OPERATING WINDSHIELD WIPERS


The wipers and washers will only operate when
the starter switch is turned to position I or II. 3
Note:
2
• DO NOT operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. 1
• In freezing or very hot conditions, ensure
that the wiper blades are not stuck to the 0
glass.
4
• In winter, remove any snow or ice from
around the wiper arms and blades, LAN0198G
including the wiped area of the windshield
and the heater air intakes. Rain sensor variable delay
Note: If the wiper blades have stuck to the Push the lever up to position 1.
glass, an electronic cut-out may temporarily
prevent the wiper motor from operating. If this Normal speed wipe
is the case, switch the wipers off and turn the Push the lever up to position 2.
starter switch off. Clear the obstruction and try
Fast speed wipe
again.
Push the lever up to position 3.
Semi-automatic operation of the wiper blades is
possible by setting the wiper lever to the rain Single wipe
sensor variable delay mode. In this mode, the Pull the lever down to position 4 and release
wipers operate only when the rain sensor immediately.
detects moisture on the windshield and remain Note: With the lever held down, the wipers will
inactive whilst the windshield is dry. operate at fast speed until the lever is released.
Auto park
If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
while the wipers are operating, they will
continue to the Park position and stop.

110
R

Wipers and Washers


Rain sensor variable delay Speed-dependent mode
Caution: BEFORE entering an automatic car When speed dependent mode is configured, the
wash, ensure that the wipers are switched off- operation of all wiper modes will be affected by
otherwise, they could operate during the car vehicle speed.
wash programme and be damaged. If the vehicle’s speed drops below 8km/h
(5 mph) with the wipers operating, the wiper
frequency automatically reduces. The wipers
will switch to the next lowest operating speed.
When the vehicle’s speed increases to over
8 km/h (5 mph), the original wiper speed
setting is restored automatically.
This setting can be configured by a Land
Rover Dealer.

LAN0199G

The rain sensor is fitted to the inside of the


windshield, immediately ahead of the rear view
mirror. The sensor is able to detect varying
amounts of dirt or water on the outside of the
windshield.
With the wiper switch in position 1, the variable
delay automatically adjusts the frequency of the
wiper operation according to the information
supplied by the rain sensor.
You can increase (a wipe will occur
immediately) or decrease the sensitivity of the
rain sensor, and therefore the frequency of
wiper operation, by rotating the delay switch-
either clockwise or counter-clockwise.
If the sensor detects constant rain, the wipers
will operate continuously.

111
L

Wipers and Washers


WINDSHIELD WASHER HEADLAMP POWER WASH
If the headlamps are on, and there is sufficient
WARNING
liquid in the washer reservoir, operating the
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures
windshield washer will also power-wash the
below 5oC (40o F), use washer fluid with
headlamps.
anti-freeze protection. In cold weather,
failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze The headlamp power wash will operate on
protection could result in impaired every fifth operation of the windshield washer,
windshield vision and increase the risk of a provided that the headlamps are still switched
vehicle crash. on and 10 minutes have elapsed since the last
headlamp wash.
Switching the headlamps off and back on again
will reset the cycle.
When using the Terrain Response system, the
headlamp wash will operate every third
operation of the windshield washer in all
Special Programs.
See, Terrain Response, 191.
LAN0200G Note: If the fluid level sensor detects a low
Push the wiper stalk button to operate the level, the headlamp power wash is inhibited.
windshield washer. If the button is pressed for Heated washer jets
more than 0.5 seconds, the washer will If the ambient temperature falls to a point where
continue to operate while the button is pressed. icing of the washer jets could occur, power is
When the button is released, the wipers will applied to heat the jets provided that the starter
complete the current stroke and then complete switch is in position II.
two further strokes before parking
automatically. An approved windshield wash is necessary to
prevent freezing in very cold weather.
If the button is pressed for less than 0.5 See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 287.
seconds, only the washer will operate.
Note: State or local regulations may restrict the
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as anti-freeze agents
in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.

112
R

Wipers and Washers


REAR WINDOW WIPER Reverse gear input
AND WASHER If reverse gear is selected while the front wipers
are operating, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly
If reverse gear is selected while the rain sensor
is operational and the front windshield wipers
are in use, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
Tailgate open disable
If the rear wiper is switched on or already
1 running and the tailgate is opened, the wiper
2 will:
LAN0201G
• stop immediately
Wiper - intermittent operation • not start to move if it is already stationary.
Pull the lever to position 1. The intermittent If the tailgate is subsequently closed, the wiper
delay period will vary according to the delay will resume its normal operation after a delay of
switch setting. three seconds.
Wiper - continuous operation If the tailgate is open and the vehicle’s speed is
If preferred the rear wiper operation can be above 3 km/h (2 mph), the wiper will operate as
configured by a Land Rover dealer to operate if the tailgate were closed.
continuously. Auto park
This setting can be configured by a Land If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
Rover Dealer. while the wiper is operating, it will continue to
the Park position and stop.
Washer
Pull the lever to position 2 and hold it. The wiper
and washer will both operate. When the lever is
released, the washer will stop and the wiper will
complete a further two wipe cycles and then
return to intermittent operation, provided that
the continuous function has not been set.

113
L

Horn
Horn

HORN

LAN0202G

To operate, press either of the horn switches.

114
R

Electric Windows
Electric Windows

ELECTRIC WINDOWS Switch operation

WARNING 5 4 2
Closing of an electrically operated window on
fingers, hands or any vulnerable part of the
body, can result in serious injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ISOLATE the rear window switches when
carrying children.
LAN0203G 3 1
ENSURE that children are kept clear whilst
raising or lowering windows. 1. Right-hand front window.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar 2. Left-hand front window.
with the controls and the potential dangers of
3. Right-hand rear window.
electrically operated windows.
4. Left-hand rear window.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through a window aperture 5. Isolating switch for rear window switches.
while the vehicle is moving - injury from Operating the windows
flying debris, branches of trees or other
The electric windows can be operated when the
obstructions could occur.
starter switch is at position I or II and for up to
It is recommended that the starter key be 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned to
removed when leaving the vehicle. position 0 (provided a front door is not
opened).
If a front door is opened, the windows become
inoperable.
To lower a window, press and hold the front of
the switch until the desired position is reached.
To raise a window, lift and hold the front of the
switch until the desired position is reached.

115
L

Electric Windows
One touch operation (front doors only) Anti-trap mechanism (front doors only)
Press/lift the switch briefly to open or close the If the anti-trap sensor detects an obstruction
window in one movement. Window movement during window closing, the closing operation is
can be stopped at any time by pressing the interrupted and the window backs off.
switch again. This is a safety feature designed to prevent
Resetting One touch operation inadvertent closing of a window on vulnerable
parts of the body or other obstructions.
Disconnecting the power when the window is
Remove any obstruction and then close the
moving will cause memory loss. To reset the
window.
memory, drive the window to the top and keep
the switch pressed for one second. If, for any reason, it is required to override the
anti-trap mechanism the following procedure
Rear window isolation switch should be used:
After the initial attempt to close the window,
attempt it twice more with less than 10 seconds
between switch presses.
On the next (fourth attempt) the window will
move up a short distance with increased force
to override the blockage.
If this fails to move the blockage the anti-trap
LAN0205G
feature will be lost and must be reset.
Press the right-hand side of the switch to See Resetting One touch operation, 116.
isolate the window switches in the rear doors;
Rear window operation
press the left-hand side to restore independent
control.

LAN0204G

The rear windows can also be operated from


the switches on the rear passenger doors. The
rear window switches will not operate if the
isolating switch in the driver’s door has been
activated.
See Rear window isolation switch, 116.

116
R

Sunroof
Sunroof

SUNROOF OPERATION
WARNING
Accidental closure of a sunroof on fingers,
hands or any vulnerable part of the body, can
result in serious personal injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ENSURE that children are kept clear and that
the sunroof is not obstructed when opening or
closing.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
operating an electrically operated sunroof.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through the sunroof aperture
LAN0206G
while the vehicle is moving - injury from
flying debris, branches of trees or other The electric sunroof can be operated when the
obstructions could occur. starter switch is at positions l or II and for 40
seconds after position 0 has been selected,
Caution: ALWAYS close the sunroof when the provided that neither front door has been
vehicle is unattended. opened.
• To tilt the sunroof: With the sunroof
closed, press the front of the switch. The
sunroof will move towards its fully tilted
position. To close the sunroof from the tilt
position, press and hold the rear of the
switch.
• To open the sunroof: With the sunroof in
the closed position, press the rear of the
switch momentarily. If the starter key is not
in position II, the switch will have to be held
pressed.
• To close the sunroof: With the sunroof
open, press the front of the switch. If the
starter key is not in position lI, the switch
will have to be held pressed.
Note: At any time while the sunroof is moving,
a further press of the switch will stop the
movement.

117
L

Sunroof
Anti-trap mechanism Sunroof blind

WARNING
It is possible to override the anti-trap
mechanism by pressing and holding the front
of the switch whilst the sunroof is closing.
Extreme care must be taken to ensure that
none of the vehicles occupants have any part
of their body in a position where it can be
trapped by the sunroof.
The override allows the sunroof to be closed
when movement is restricted by ice or dirt. LAN0207G

Pull the sunroof blind, across the sunroof


If the sunroof encounters resistance while
aperture to open and close.
travelling anywhere between the fully open and
the closed position, the closing operation is Note: The sunroof blind can be opened and
interrupted and the sunroof opens slightly. This closed manually, but will retract automatically
is a safety feature designed to prevent when the sunroof is opened and will open
inadvertent closing of the sunroof on vulnerable slightly if the roof is tilted.
parts of the body or other obstructions.
Remove any obstruction and then close the
sunroof.
This anti-trap feature does not apply while the
sunroof is closing from the tilted position.
Operation after power supply interruption
Under certain unusual circumstances, the
sunroof may lose its calibration which will
render it inoperable. If this happens, it needs to
be recalibrated as follows:
• With the power supply reconnected, turn
the starter switch to position ll.
• Depress the front of the switch for 20
seconds. The sunroof will start to move.
Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the sunroof stops
moving, release the switch.
The sunroof can then be operated as normal.
Note: Calibration will not function if the vehicle
battery voltage is low.

118
R

Heating and Ventilation


TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Heating and Ventilation

11 3 1 2 3 11

10
4 9
8

5 6 7
LAN0211N

The Air conditioning system features automatic In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution
temperature and air distribution control and is and blower speeds are adjusted automatically
programmed to maintain optimum levels of to achieve, and then maintain, a thermal
comfort within the vehicle in all but the most environment consistent with prevailing
severe climatic conditions. conditions.
The configuration of controls may vary The air distribution and blower controls can be
depending on the vehicle specification. The operated independently to override the
variants are shown as inset to the main automatic setting.
illustration. In this case, the appropriate indicator in the
The system may be fitted with the options of AUTO switch extinguishes. The circular
seat heating and windshield heating. indicator represents the blower, the rectangular
Note: The indicators in the switches illuminate indicator represents air distribution.
when that feature is operational. Press AUTO again to re-establish automatic
operation.
OPERATION OF CONTROLS
Note: If the air distribution and blower controls
1. Auto mode are operated independently, the system may
Allowing the system to function automatically is not be able to achieve or maintain the required
the simplest method of operation and is temperature settings.
preferable in most operating conditions. 2. Blower control
• Press AUTO (1) for fully automatic Rotate the blower control (2) to adjust airflow
operation. through the vents.
• Rotate the temperature controls (3) to
select the required temperature.
• Let the automatic temperature control
system do the rest.

119
L

Heating and Ventilation


3. Temperature controls 5. Air recirculation
Rotate the controls (3) to set the required Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from
temperature for the corresponding side of the outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
passenger compartment. the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
Temperatures within the range 16°C (60°F) to entry of traffic fumes.
28°C (83°F) can be set. The blue dot gives Air recirculation also significantly influences
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
heating (depending on prevailing conditions). the air-conditioning system.
Note: Because of the mixing of air within the Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient
vehicle, the system will not achieve a temperatures may cause the windows to mist.
temperature differential from left to right of Press the button (5) once to
more than 4°C (39°F). activate air recirculation (switch
To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the indicator illuminates). Press the
temperature controls fully counter-clockwise. button a second time to deselect recirculation
This mode automatically activates the air and return to fresh air intake (switch indicator
conditioning and air recirculation, sets the extinguishes).
blower speed at maximum and the air With recirculation deselected, the ventilation
distribution to the face-level vents. system may automatically re-activate
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully recirculation, if necessary, to enable optimum
clockwise provides maximum heating to the air-conditioning performance. When this
foot/windshield vents. occurs, the switch indicator will not illuminate.
When in stationary traffic, select P or N in an 6. Off
automatic transmission vehicle to maximise air Press to switch the system off; the
conditioning efficiency. indicator in the switch will
4. Air distribution control illuminate to show this condition.
Pressing the button again returns the system to
Press to select the desired distribution setting:
its previous mode.
Windshield and side window vents
7. Economy mode
With the engine running, press the
Face level vents button (7) to put the air
conditioning system into Economy
Foot level vents mode. This turns off the air conditioning
compressor which reduces the power
consumed by the system and system
performance. Prolonged use may cause the
More than one setting can be selected to
windows to mist.
achieve the desired distribution.

120
R

Heating and Ventilation


8. Heated rear window 11. Front seat heaters
Press the left or right button once
WARNING
to operate the relevant seat heater
DO NOT stick labels over the heating
at a high level, press twice to heat
elements on the rear window, and DO NOT
the seat at a lower level. For further information
scrape or use abrasive materials to clean the
concerning the operation of both front and rear
inside of the rear window.
seat heaters, please refer to SEAT HEATERS,
122.
Press to operate.
Note: Heated rear window and General notes
windshield functions are only • For optimum operating efficiency, ensure
available while engine is running. all the air vents (including those in the rear
of the vehicle) are open.
9. Heated windshield
• For the automatic temperature control
Press to operate.
system to function efficiently, all windows
(and the sunroof) should be closed, and the
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
10. Defrost mode
or other debris.
If the windshield is misting or
covered in ice, press button (10) to • In very humid conditions, slight screen
activate the automatic defrost misting may be experienced when the air
programme; the system will immediately direct conditioning system is turned on. This is a
its output to achieve maximum windshield natural occurrence on automotive air
clearing by: conditioning systems. It is not a fault and
misting will clear after a few seconds once
• setting the blower speed to an appropriate the air conditioning system is operating.
level.
• The air conditioning compressor will not
• distributing air flow to the windshield only. function unless the engine is running.
• deactivating air recirculation (in certain • Surplus water produced by the
circumstances). dehumidifying process is expelled from the
In addition, the rear window and windshield system via drain tubes beneath the vehicle.
heaters will be switched on (or their timed This may result in a small pool of water
operating cycle will recommence if they are forming on the road when the vehicle is
already switched on). stationary and is not a cause for concern.
Press the button a second time (or select AUTO
or any air distribution control) to switch off the
Defrost mode. Heated window/windshield will
remain on until their time-out period has
expired.

121
L

Heating and Ventilation


SEAT HEATERS The seat heaters are thermostatically controlled
and will operate to maintain a factory-set
Caution: The seat heaters consume
temperature. The indicators in the switches will
considerable power from the battery. For this
remain illuminated until the heaters are
reason, they should ONLY be operated while
manually turned off, the high level has timed
the engine is running.
out, or the engine is turned off.

LAN0213N

Front seat heaters

LAN0214G

Rear seat heaters


With the starter switch turned on, the seat
cushion and seat back can be heated at two
different levels.
• Press the switch once to operate at a high
level (both indicators illuminate).
After a period based on cabin temperature,
the high level will end and one lamp will
extinguish.
• Press twice to heat the seats at a lower level
(right-hand indicator extinguishes).
• Press the switch a third time to turn off the
heater manually (both indicators will
extinguish).

122
R

Heating and Ventilation


VENTILATION

AUTO

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

LAN0215L

The ventilation system provides fresh, Particulate air filter


conditioned and/or heated air to the interior of The ventilation system is fitted with a
the vehicle from the air intake grille in front of particulate air filter to remove most potentially
the windshield. harmful particles such as pollen, industrial
Note: Always keep the air intake grille clear of fall-out and road dust from the air entering the
obstructions such as leaves, snow or ice. vehicle's interior.
Air outlets are provided to the windshield, face, Combined filter
lap (driver only) and feet - the location of these Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
vents is shown in the illustration above. The control have a combined carbon and particulate
temperature of the air supplied to the vents is air filter.
controlled by the heater.
The carbon layer reduces the level of odours
coming through the heater system from
outside.

123
L

Heating and Ventilation


AIR VENTS

LAN0217

124
R

Heating and Ventilation


Air temperature from all vents is controlled by
the temperature settings of the heater.
1. Face level vents
Direct the air flow by moving the control in the
center of the louvres. Rotate the thumbwheel
towards the right to fully open, or the left to fully
close the vents.
To ensure best ventilation and minimum noise,
the vents should be fully open when the air
distribution control is set to face level.
2. Driver’s lap vent
Airflow can be directed to the driver’s lap via a
vent located below the steering wheel. Control
the airflow by adjusting the louvres.
3. Center console rear vent controls
Move the louvres to adjust the direction and
volume of airflow. Rotate the bezel to direct the
air flow.
Note: The temperature cannot be set by the rear
occupants.

125
L

Interior Lamps
Interior Lamps

LAMP TYPES Automatic activation


The vehicle’s interior lighting falls into two All of the courtesy lighting comes on when:
categories: • The position of the starter switch is
• Courtesy lighting consists of approach changed to 0, from I or II.
lamps, footwell lamps, puddle lamps, • Any door, including the tailgate is ajar.
starter switch glow ring and loadspace • The vehicle receives an unlock signal.
lamp. They enable safe entry into, or exit
from the vehicle in low light conditions The courtesy lamp feature automatically turns
without the need to switch on individual off these lamps if:
lamps. • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
• Demand lighting consists of interior lamps, elapsed since the courtesy lamps were
map lamps, glovebox and vanity mirror activated.
lamps. They offer lighting at the touch of a • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
switch, usually part of the lamp fitting. elapsed since the last door was closed.

Courtesy lighting • the starter switch is turned to II with all


doors closed.
Front footwell lamps
A battery-saving feature turns off all interior
These illuminate the front footwell areas of the
lamps 15 minutes after the starter switch has
vehicle.
been turned from II or I to 0. This timing feature
Starter switch glow ring will be restarted if any of the automatic
This surrounds and illuminates the starter switch-on criteria occur.
switch.
Collision illumination
Loadspace lamp In the event of a collision occurring at a speed
This illuminates the rear loadspace area during of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), all of the courtesy
entry to and exit from the vehicle, also when the lamps (except approach lamps) will be turned
tailgate is opened. on.

126
R

Interior Lamps
Front interior lamps Map lamp operation
Press the required map lamp switch to turn on
and off.
Glovebox lamp
Illuminates automatically (with headlamps on)
whenever the glovebox is opened and
extinguishes when the glovebox is closed.
Vanity mirror lamps
The vanity mirror lamps are turned on when the
corresponding vanity mirror cover is opened
LAN0218G
and turned off when it is closed.
The front interior lamps are grouped together
centrally above the front windshield.
Any of the interior lamps can be switched on or
off by pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp
required.
It is possible to de-activate the courtesy lamps
automatic mode by pressing the center switch.
The message INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF will flash LAN0220G

in the message center.


Note: Map lamps, glovebox lamps and vanity
To switch the lamps off without disabling
mirror lamps will extinguish automatically after
automatic mode briefly press the center switch.
15 minutes to prevent battery drain provided
To enable automatic mode press the front that the starter switch is in position 0.
center switch for more than three seconds. The
message INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC will Low-level night-time illumination
flash in the message center. When the main lighting switch is turned to
sidelamps or headlamps, LEDs in the front
Rear interior lamps interior lamps provides very low level
illumination. The level of illumination can be
adjusted using the instrument pack illumination
dimmer switch.
See Dimmer control, 108.
Low level lighting provides very limited
illumination for the interior of the vehicle, whilst
the vehicle is being driven, without affecting the
driver’s night vision.

LAN0219G

127
L

Interior Equipment
SMOKERS’ EQUIPMENT AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS
Interior Equipment

Lighter Rear auxiliary power socket

LAN0223G

A power socket is located on the rear face of the


center console.
Loadspace auxiliary power socket
LAN0222G

With the starter switch turned on, press the


lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
correct temperature it will partially eject and
can then be withdrawn for use.
• ONLY hold the lighter by the handle.
After use, push the lighter back in to the first
position.
Ashtrays
LAN0224G

WARNING
Another power socket is fitted in the left-hand
DO NOT use the ashtrays for disposing of
side trim in the loadspace.
waste paper or other combustible items.
Using a power socket
To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the Caution: NEVER plug non-approved
ashtray upwards. accessories into a power socket - damage to
the vehicle's electrical systems could occur.
Always run the engine during prolonged use
of electrical accessories, otherwise the
battery may become discharged.
The power sockets can be used to power Land
Rover approved accessories that use a
maximum of 180 watts.

128
R

Interior Equipment
CUP HOLDERS

1
2

LAN0225G

129
L

Interior Equipment
WARNING
The driver should not drink and should not use
the cup holder while driving.
If the cup holder is retractable, it should be
kept closed when not in use.
Do not carry open-top drink containers in the
cup holders while the vehicle is in motion; a
spilled hot drink could cause personal injury.
Spilled drinks can also damage upholstery,
carpeting and electrical components.
Use only for soft containers. DO NOT use to
hold cups made of glass, china or hard
plastic, as these may cause injury in the event
of an accident or emergency manoeuvre.
Unopened, sealed containers (drinks cans,
for example) are hard objects and may also
cause injury.

1 and 2. Front seat cup holders


The inner core of the front passenger’s cup
holder can be lifted out for cleaning or to make
a holder for a larger drinks container.
3. Rear seats cup holders
The cup holders for the occupants of the rear
seats are in the center console. Pull out the tray
to gain access to the cup holders. Press in
again to close.
The inner cores of the cup holders can be lifted
out for cleaning or to make a holder for a larger
drinks container.

130
R

Interior Equipment
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

3
2

LAN0226G

131
L

Interior Equipment
1 and 2. GLOVEBOX If the engine is started, the indicator will
Lift the release catch to open the upper illuminate and the cooler box will operate.
glovebox. The lid will naturally be returned by a To protect the vehicle’s battery, the cooler box
spring to its closed position. It should be should be switched off when not needed.
pushed fully closed.
Pull the release catch to open the lower
glovebox. Close the lid by pushing it until it
clicks.
CD storage rack
If the optional cooler box has been specified a
CD storage rack is available for the glovebox.
The rack can be removed by pressing down the
lock tab, and pulling the rack out of the
glovebox. LAN0227G

3. CUBBY BOX The tray on top of the cooler box should always
be in place to ensure maximum cooling
Lift the catch at the front of the cubby box lid to
performance. This tray can be inverted to allow
access the main cubby box.
the storage of taller bottles while still
Card holder maintaining the sealing.
On the front inside face of the cubby box is a The tray can be clipped onto the inside of the
feature to hold a credit/toll card. main lid when not required.
CD storage The cooler box is most effective when filled with
A rubber mat in the bottom of the cubby box is cold or pre-chilled items.
designed to hold CD cases and is removable for The cooler box must be cleaned regularly to
cleaning. remove any condensation or contamination
that could lead to odours.
3. COOLER BOX
Note: The cooler box will continue to operate
Switch on/off using the switch on the inside for a short period after the starter switch is
front lip of the cooler box. This switch has a turned to position 0.
built-in indicator which will illuminate to show
that the cooler box is operating. There is a short 4. ADDITIONAL STORAGE
delay (1-2 seconds) between pressing the Further storage areas as indicated.
switch, and illumination of the indicator.
If the indicator does not illuminate when the
cooler box is switched on, or it goes out while
the cooler box is operating, battery voltage is
low and the cooler box has switched off. This
will only happen when the engine is not
running.

132
R

Interior Equipment
SUN VISOR REAR-VIEW MIRROR
Auto-dim rear-view mirror

LAN0228G

Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun LAN0231G


glare through the windshield. If required, the
The vehicle is equipped with an
visor can then be pivoted towards the side
electrochromatic dimming function that dims
window to reduce sun glare from that side of
the mirrors to reduce glare from the headlamps
the vehicle.
of following vehicles at night.
Vanity mirror This function does not operate when reverse
Lifting the cover of the vanity mirror switches gear has been selected.
on the lamp; closing the cover switches off the
lamp.

133
L

Interior Equipment
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS
WARNING
DO NOT carry unsecured equipment, tools or
luggage, which could move and cause
personal injury in the event of an accident or
emergency manoeuvre either on or off-road.

LAN0232G

Four fixing points are provided in the rear


loadspace floor, to assist in safely securing
large items of luggage. Land Rover provide a
range of approved luggage retention
accessories.

134
R

Loadspace Cover
Loadspace Cover

LOADSPACE COVER To operate the loadspace cover


Caution: When retracting the cover ensure
that nothing is left on top. If any items are left
on top, including paper or fabrics, they may
be drawn into the mechanism and cause it to
jam.
Caution: If the cover is damaged in any way it
should not be used as the damaged area may
prevent the cover from operating correctly.
1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
the cover.
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
features moulded into the loadspace sides.

LAN0234G

The loadspace cover is a cassette unit with a


roller-blind type of cover which can be
extended to cover the rear loadspace.

135
L

Loadspace Cover
To remove the loadspace cover

WARNING
When fitting the loadspace cover position
ensure that the location pegs on the left hand
side are fully engaged and the release button
on the right hand side has returned fully to
ensure engagement. Failure to do so may
allow the cassette to move when the vehicle
is in motion.

LAN0235G

1. Disengage the ends from the recess and


fully retract the cover into the cassette unit.
2. Push the release button on the right-hand
side of the cassette housing and lift to
release the right-hand side of the cassette
from the loadspace trim.
3. Manoeuvre the complete loadspace cover
to the right-hand side to release the
left-hand side location pegs and extract
from the vehicle.
4. Installation of the loadspace cover is the
reverse of the removal procedure above.

136
R

In-Car Telephones
In-Car Telephones

IN-CAR TELEPHONES
WARNING
Using any hand-held appliance while driving
can be dangerous. Always stop the vehicle
before making a call and ensure that the
telephone is switched off while you are
driving.

For your safety, always note the following


precautions before fitting an in-car telephone,
or any mobile communication equipment.
• Only use an installation kit incorporating an
antenna external to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the installation is carried out by
a competent installer and that the installer
is aware of the Air bag SRS System.

137
L

Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition

VOICE RECOGNITION Navigation and Telephone commands


Voice control provides a safe and convenient • Phone help - To list Telephone commands.
way of operating the audio system without the • Navigation help - To list Navigation
need to operate the controls manually. This commands.
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the
vehicle, and removes the need to divert your Please refer to the Navigation and
attention from the road ahead in order to Telephone Systems Handbook.
change settings, or receive feedback from the Activating the system
system.
A number of voice commands are available, and
with a little experience you will find them easy
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system
active, the voice control system converts your
command into a control signal for the audio
system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues
or commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
Defined voice commands
The voice control system understands
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands: LAN0237G

General commands To activate voice control:


• Voice help - To list all commands. • Briefly pull the control paddle (the Audio
• Notepad help - To list Notepad commands. will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
signal will be heard, and LISTENING will be
Audio commands displayed on the main message center to
• Radio help - To list Radio commands. indicate that the system is now waiting for
a voice command.
• CD help - To list CD commands.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering
See Audio System, 293.
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.

138
R

Voice Recognition
Using Notepad
Notepad is a feature for recording short
messages as memory aids or reminders.
You can record up to 10 notes for up to 30
seconds each.
Pull the voice paddle towards the steering
wheel, wait for LISTENING to appear in the
message center, then give the Notepad
command.
The voice recording will automatically be
stopped if the note is longer than 30 seconds.
To stop voice recording at any time, pull the
voice button towards the steering wheel.

Command System response Action


Record note or Notepad The system gives a beep to You may start your recording
record. indicate the start of recording. after the beep. To stop
recording, pull and hold in the
steering wheel voice paddle.
Play Notepad or Read Notepad audio will read out Saying Replay will replay the
Notepad. each note in turn. You can say previous message.
Replay, Delete or Cancel after Saying Delete will delete the
each beep, or remain silent to previous message.
hear the next note. Saying Cancel will end the
Notepad session.
Clear Notepad or Notepad Do you want to clear the Say Yes to delete all stored
delete. Notepad? notes. Say No to cancel the
command.
Notepad help. The system will read out
Notepad information and all
the commonly used
commands.

139
L

Land Rover Homelink®


Land Rover Homelink®

HOMELINK® TRANSMITTER Precautions


When programming your HomeLink®
WARNING Transmitter, you will be operating the garage
Do not use this HomeLink® Transmitter with door or gate. Be sure that people and objects
any garage door that lacks safety stop and are out of the way, to prevent potential harm or
reverse features, as required by federal damage.
safety standard (this includes any garage or
door opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which
cannot detect an object in the path of a closing
door and then automatically stop and reverse
the door, does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk of
serious injury or death. For more information
on this matter, call toll-free: 1-800-355-3515
or consult www.homelink.com.

The Land Rover HomeLink® Universal


Transmitter is built into the underside of the
rear view mirror and provides a convenient way
to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This innovative 1
feature will learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate garage 2
doors and gates. With the available accessory
H6480N
package, the HomeLink® Transmitter can also
control home or office lighting and security 1. Status indicator light
systems. For reliability, the HomeLink® Red - transmitter
Transmitter is powered by your vehicle’s
Green - auto dimming
battery and charging system.
2. Channel buttons

140
R

Land Rover Homelink®


Programming If after repeated attempts you do not
1. Turn the starter switch to the second successfully program the HomeLink®
position. Transmitter to learn the signal of the hand-held
transmitter, call toll-free for customer
2. If you have previously programmed your
assistance: 1-800-355-3515 or consult
HomeLink® Transmitter, proceed to step 3.
www.homelink.com.
Otherwise, hold down the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink® Transmitter Operating the Land Rover HomeLink®
until the red light (1) begins to flash Transmitter
(approximately 20 seconds). Release both Once it is programmed, the HomeLink®
buttons. Transmitter can be used in place of your
This initializes the HomeLink® Transmitter hand-held transmitter(s). To operate, simply
and erases previous settings from all three press the appropriate button on the HomeLink®
channels. Transmitter. The red light (1) comes on while
DO NOT perform this step when the signal is being transmitted.
programming additional hand-held Note: If your hand-held transmitter appears to
transmitters. program the HomeLink® Transmitter, but does
3. Decide which one of the three channels you not open your garage door and, if your garage
want to program. door was manufactured after 1995, your garage
door opener may have a code protected or
4. Hold the signal-emitting end of your rolling code feature.
hand-held transmitter 5 - 14 cm (1 - 3 in.)
away from the HomeLink® Transmitter A rolling code type of system will change the
buttons so that you can still see the red code of your garage door opener every time you
status indicator light (1). open or close your garage door.
5. With one hand, push the hand-held To determine if you have one of these systems,
transmitter button, and with the other, the depress the button on your HomeLink®
desired button on the HomeLink® Transmitter that you programmed. If the red
Transmitter. Continue to press both light on the HomeLink® Transmitter flashes
buttons through step 6. rapidly for 1-2 seconds, then lights
continuously, your garage door opener has a
6. Hold down both buttons until you see the rolling code system.
red light on the Land Rover HomeLink®
Transmitter flash, first slowly and then
rapidly (this could take up to a minute). It
indicates that you have successfully
programmed the HomeLink® Transmitter
to learn the new frequency signal. Release
both buttons once the rapid flashing
begins.
7. Turn the starter switch to the off position.

141
L

Land Rover Homelink®


Training a garage door opener equipped with e) Your garage door opener should now
rolling codes recognise your HomeLink® Transmitter. If
To train your rolling code garage door opener to not, repeat the procedure but in step d),
operate from your HomeLink® Transmitter, press and release the transmitter button
follow these steps: three times. You may use either your
HomeLink® Transmitter or your original
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the
hand-held transmitter to open your garage
HomeLink® Transmitter by following the
door.
procedures outlined previously (if you have
already completed this programming, If after following these suggestions you still
proceed to the next instruction). have difficulties programming your HomeLink®
Transmitter, call toll-free for customer
2. Train your garage door opener receiver to
assistance: 1-800-355-3515 or consult
recognise your HomeLink® Transmitter:
www.homelink.com.
(your garage door opener receiver will
learn to recognise the HomeLink® Erasing channels
Transmitter by following the same process To erase all three programmed channels, hold
used to train the hand-held transmitter). down the two outside buttons until the red light
a) Remove the cover panel from your begins to flash, then release both buttons.
garage door opener receiver (the receiver Individual channels cannot be erased, but can
should be located by the garage door be reprogrammed using the procedures for
motor). programming the HomeLink® Transmitter
b) Locate the training button on the garage (steps 3 through 6).
door opener receiver. The exact location
and colour of the button may vary by
garage door opener brand. If you have
difficulty locating the training button,
reference your garage door opener manual,
call 1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
c) Press the training button on the garage
door opener receiver for 1-2 seconds, then
perform the next step within 30 seconds.
d) Return to the HomeLink® Transmitter in
the vehicle and depress the programmed
button twice. Depress the button to
confirm that the HomeLink® Transmitter
has been trained to the receiver.

142
R

Land Rover Homelink®


Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to the HomeLink®
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Transmitter using a previously trained button:
FCC ID:NZLBTPHL3
1. Press and hold the desired button. No NOT
IC: 4112A-NZLBTPHL
release the button until step 4 has been
This device complies with Part 15 FCC
completed.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
2. When the indicator light begins to flash two conditions:
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
1. This device may not cause harmful
hand-held transmitter 5 - 14 cm (1 - 3 in.)
interference.
away from the HomeLink® Transmitter
surface. 2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
interference that may cause undesired
button. The HomeLink® indicator light will
operation.
flash, at first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
HomeLink® is a registered trademark owned by
rapidly, release both buttons.
the Johnson Controls, Inc. Milwaukee,
Note: Be sure to retain your original transmitter Wisconsin.
for future programming procedures (i.e. new
vehicle purchase).
When selling your vehicle, be sure to erase all
channels on the HomeLink® Transmitter that
you programmed.
Accessories
Accessories for your HomeLink® Transmitter
are available from the manufacturer of the
device. If you would like additional information
or would like to purchase other accessories
such as home lighting or security products that
can be operated by the HomeLink®
Transmitter, please call the toll-free:
1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.

143
L

Starting and Driving


Driving and Operating

STEERING COLUMN LOCK STARTER SWITCH


The starter switch uses the following sequence
WARNING
of key positions to operate the steering lock,
Once the steering lock is engaged, it is
electrical circuits and starter motor:
impossible to steer the vehicle. DO NOT
remove the key while the vehicle is in motion. Position 0
• Steering locked.
Caution: The gear selector MUST be in the P
• Some lighting circuits are operational,
(park) position, before the starter key can be
including: sidelamps and hazard warning
removed. If the starter key is left in place, a
lamps.
continuous battery drain occurs which could
completely discharge the battery. • With the driver’s door open, seat memory
facility operational.
Position I
• Steering unlocked.
• Clock, audio system and lighter can now be
operated.
• Wipers/washers are operational.
Position II
• All instruments, warning indicators and
LAN0238G
electrical circuits are operational.

The starter switch and steering column lock are Position III
located in the side of the steering column cover. • The starting sequence is initiated. Note that
operation of position I electrical functions
To unlock the steering column
will be interrupted during engine cranking.
Insert the key into the starter switch and rotate
Note: The gear selector position P or N must be
key to position l. If the key will not rotate, turn
selected before the engine can be started.
the steering wheel left or right while rotating the
key.
To lock the steering column
Remove the key from the starter switch.
The lock is now set to operate. Rotate the
steering wheel until the lock engages.

144
R

Starting and Driving


STARTING Cold climates
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
WARNING lamp may take several seconds to extinguish.
Never start or leave the engine running in an Similarly, engine cranking times will also
unventilated building - exhaust gases are increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
poisonous and contain carbon monoxide, may require continuous operation for as long
which can cause unconsciousness and may as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
even be fatal. this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
If the engine fails to start, continued use of the maximise the available battery effort for
starter may result in unburnt fuel damaging the starting.
catalytic converter.
After starting
1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that
the transmission selector is in the P (Park) Ensure that the parkbrake AND FOOT BRAKE
or N (Neutral) position. are firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is
not depressed while moving the gear selector
2. Switch off all unnecessary electrical
lever from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
equipment.
movement if the foot brake is not applied.
3. Turn the starter switch to position II and
then on to position III and immediately
release it. The starter will automatically
switch off when the engine starts. DO NOT
press the accelerator pedal while starting.
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
warning lamps should extinguish as soon as
the engine is running.

145
L

Starting and Driving


GENERAL DRIVING ADVICE Vehicle height
Caution: The overall height of your vehicle
Instruments and warning indicators exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars. See,
Caution: Red warning indicators are of DIMENSIONS, 292. Always be aware of the
particular importance, their illumination height of your vehicle and check the available
indicating that a fault exists. If a red light headroom before driving through low
illuminates, always stop the vehicle and seek entrances. This is particularly important if the
qualified assistance before continuing. vehicle is fitted with a roof rack or if a sunroof
In the case of the parkbrake, the above only is open.
applies if the vehicle is moving when the Vehicle stability
indicator illuminates.
Before driving it is important to fully WARNING
understand the function of the instruments and Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
warning indicators. roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.
See INSTRUMENT PACK, 83. Since these vehicles are designed to be
operated off-road, these vehicles have a
Power assisted steering higher ground clearance and hence a higher
Note: Power assistance is dependent on the center of gravity. Such a feature has been
engine running. If the engine is not running, a associated with an increased risk of vehicle
much greater effort will be required to steer the roll-over.
vehicle. Another factor shown to significantly increase
Warming up roll-over risk is unauthorized vehicle
modifications such as fitting incorrect
In the interests of fuel economy and of reducing
specification tires, oversize tires, body
engine wear, it is advisable to drive the vehicle
lifting, incorrect springs/dampers, incorrect
straight away, remembering that harsh
vehicle loading/trailer towing.
acceleration or labouring the engine before the
normal operating temperature has been However, on-road crash data also indicates
reached can damage the engine. that driver behaviour is a greater factor than a
high center of gravity in determining a
When the engine is cold, engine idle speeds will
vehicle's overall roll-over rate. The single
be faster than normal. Under these
most effective driver behaviour that can
circumstances, use the foot brake to control the
reduce the risk of injury or death in all crashes
vehicle while idling until the engine is warm and
including roll-over, is to ALWAYS WEAR
running at normal speed, and be aware of the
YOUR SEAT BELT and to properly restrain all
need to take additional care when
child passengers in the rear seat in an
manoeuvering the vehicle.
appropriate child safety seat. In a roll-over
crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt.

146
R

Starting and Driving


Other measures that can reduce the risk of WARNING
injury and death from vehicle crashes and
Many vehicle roll-overs occur when a driver
roll-over are:
attempts to bring a vehicle back onto the road
• Limit speed. Posted speed limits should after some or all of the wheels drift onto the
never be exceeded, and you should always shoulder of the road, especially when the
drive below these limits whenever traffic, shoulder is unpaved. If you find yourself in
weather, road or other conditions dictate. such a situation, do not initiate any sharp or
Always use your common sense and good abrupt steering and/or braking manoeuvers to
judgement. re-enter the roadway. Instead, let the vehicle
• Take curves at reasonable speeds, avoiding slow down as much as safely possible before
unnecessary braking. attempting to re-enter the roadway and keep
• Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road your wheels as straight as possible while
and weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking re-entering the roadway.
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane changing or abrupt manoeuvers. Breakdown safety
• Assume that pedestrians and other drivers If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
are going to make mistakes. Anticipate • Wherever possible, consistent with road
what they might do. Be ready for their safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
mistakes. should be moved off the main highway,
• Avoid distractions such as cellular phone preferably onto the shoulder as far as
calling, reading, eating, drinking or possible.
reaching for items on the floor. • Switch on hazard warning lamps.
• Before changing lanes, check your mirrors • If possible, position a warning triangle or a
and use the direction/turn indicators. flashing amber light at an appropriate
• Always leave room for unexpected events distance from the vehicle to warn other
such as sudden braking. traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
requirements of some countries).
• Never operate your vehicle when you have
consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued • Consider evacuating passengers through
or have taken any medication that affects the doors facing away from traffic, to a safe
judgement, reflexes or alertness. area away from the vehicle, as a precaution
in case your vehicle is accidentally struck
by another one.

147
L

Starting and Driving


Fuel economy Breaking-in
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major Proper breaking-in will have a direct bearing on
factors: the reliability and smooth running of the vehicle
• How your vehicle is maintained. throughout its life.
• How you drive your vehicle. In particular, the engine, gearbox, brake pads
and tires need time to bed-in and adjust to the
To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential
demands of everyday motoring. During the first
that the vehicle is maintained in accordance
800 km (500 miles), it is essential to drive with
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
consideration for the breaking-in process, and
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner to avoid situations where heavy braking is
element, tire pressures and wheel alignment required, heed the following advice:
will have a significant effect on fuel
• LIMIT maximum road speed to 110 km/h
consumption. But, above all, the way in which
(70 mph) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive
you drive is most important. The following hints
the vehicle on a light accelerator and only
may help you to obtain better value from your
increase engine speeds gradually once the
motoring:
breaking-in distance has been completed.
• Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop
• DO NOT operate at full accelerator or allow
journeys.
the engine to labour in any gear.
• Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and
• AVOID fast acceleration and heavy braking
smoothly from rest.
except in emergencies.
• Do not drive in the lower gears for longer
than necessary. Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
that the brake pads are examined for wear and
• Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
heavy braking.
and optimum performance.
• Anticipate obstructions and adjust your
speed accordingly well in advance.
• When stationary in traffic, select neutral to
improve fuel economy and air conditioning
performance.
• Turn off air conditioning when not
required.

148
R

Starting and Driving


Servicing requirements BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Vehicles which operate in arduous conditions, Before driving off-road, it is absolutely essential
particularly on dusty, muddy or wet terrain, and that drivers become familiar with the vehicle’s
vehicles which, undergo frequent or deep controls, in particular the transfer gear switch,
wading conditions will require more frequent CommandShift, Hill Descent Control (HDC) and
servicing. Contact a Land Rover Dealer for the Terrain Response system.
advice.
Basic information and Off-Road driving
After wading in salt water, or driving on sandy techniques can be found in the Off-Road driving
beaches, use a hose to wash the underbody handbook, available on-line at:
components and exposed body panels with http://www.ownerinfo.landrover.com
fresh water. This will help to protect the It is strongly recommended that off-road driver
vehicle's cosmetic appearance and prevent training is undertaken by anyone intending to
impairment of parkbrake efficiency. drive off-road. Training is available at your
Wading nearest Land Rover Experience center. More
details can be found at:
Caution: The maximum advisable wading http://www.landroverexperience.com
depth is normally 490 mm (19 in.). but can be
increased to 540 mm (21 in.), when the air AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
suspension system is operated at Off-road Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment
height. Wading at a depth greater than the such as roller generators that are driven by
maximum advisable wading depth is not only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
recommended. will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
If the vehicle remains stationary for any Some local jurisdictions require emission
length of time, in water above the level of the testing using two-wheel roller dynamometer.
door sills, severe electrical damage may Your vehicle is equipped with permanent
occur. 4-wheel drive and cannot be safely operated on
Do not switch off the engine during wading. If these machines. For more information
the engine stalls during wading, re-start regarding safe emission testing of your vehicle,
immediately. Should the engine stall, get it consult your Land Rover Dealer.
checked by a Land Rover Dealer as soon as
possible.
If during wading, water enters the engine air
intake, switch off immediately. The vehicle
should be towed from the water and
recovered to a Land Rover Dealer.

149
L

Starting and Driving


EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING WARNING
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous substances Exhaust system temperatures can be
and inhalation can cause unconsciousness extremely high - DO NOT park on ground
and may even be fatal. where combustible materials such as dry
• DO NOT inhale exhaust gases grass or leaves could come into contact with
the exhaust system - in dry weather a fire
• DO NOT START or leave the engine
could result.
running in an enclosed, unventilated
area, or drive with the tailgate/tailglass
Caution: Catalytic converters can be easily
open.
damaged through improper use, particularly
• DO NOT modify the exhaust system from if the wrong fuel is used, or if an engine
the original design. misfire occurs. For this reason it is VERY
• ALWAYS have exhaust system leaks IMPORTANT that you heed the precautions
repaired immediately. which follow.
• If you think exhaust fumes are entering
the vehicle, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately.

Land Rover vehicles are fitted with emission


and evaporative control equipment necessary
to meet a number of territorial requirements.
In many countries it is against the law for
vehicle owners to modify or tamper with
emission control equipment, or to sanction the
unauthorised replacement or modification of
this equipment. In such cases the vehicle owner
and the repairer may both be liable for legal
penalties.
It is important to remember that all Land Rover
Dealers are properly equipped to perform
repairs and to maintain the emission control
system on the vehicle.

150
R

Fuel and Refuelling


Fuel and Refuelling

GAS STATION SAFETY FUEL FILLER


WARNING WARNING
Petroleum gases are highly inflammable and, To avoid any sudden discharge of fuel caused
in confined spaces, are also extremely by excessive fuel vapor pressure, DO NOT
explosive. fully remove the filler cap until any captive
tank pressure has been released.
WARNING Take careful note of warning labels located
If a flash fire occurs during refuelling, leave around the filler cap.
the nozzle in the vehicle fill pipe and back
away from the vehicle. Notify the station Caution: The fuel filler flap has a spring
attendant at once so that all dispensing loaded release, do not force it open. If the flap
devices and pumps can be shut off with has been forced open, it may fail to close
emergency controls. If the facility is properly. In this eventuality, take your vehicle
unattended, use the emergency intercom to to your Land Rover Dealer for attention, as
summon help and the emergency shutdown this condition may be due to damaged or
button to shut off the pump. misaligned components.
Caution: When replacing the fuel filler cap
Always take sensible precautions when ensure that it is tightened until it clicks three
refuelling: times. Failure to do so may result in the
• Switch off the engine. engine warning indicator illuminating due to
evaporative emission levels increasing.
• Do not smoke or introduce other ignition
sources.
• Switch off mobile phones.
• Take care not to spill fuel.
• Do not overfill the tank.
• Do not fill gas cans in the vehicle.
• Do not leave the fuel filler pump unattended
during refuelling.
• Use only the hold-open latch provided on
the fuel filler pump. Never jam the latch LAN0735N
open with some other object.
The fuel filler is located behind the rear
right-hand wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.

151
L

Fuel and Refuelling


Press and release the left side of the fuel filler
flap to open (shown in inset).

1 2

LAN0242G

Insert the pump nozzle 1 into the filler neck,


LAN0240G
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover 2.
The fuel filler flap springs out revealing the filler When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
cap. and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
until you hear it click three times.

PREMIUM
TIGHTEN UNTIL CAP CLICKS UNLEADED FUEL ONLY
OR ENGINE LIGHT MAY COME ON
SEE OWNERS GUIDE
ESSENCE PREMIUM
SANS PLOMB
SEULEMENT

LAN0439G

Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the


projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.

LAN0269N

152
R

Fuel and Refuelling


TYPE OF FUEL Note: Mid or regular grade gasoline with a CLC
or AKI octane rating of not lower than 87 may
also be used, but performance and fuel
IMPORTANT INFORMATION economy will be reduced.
ONLY USE PREMIUM UNLEADED FUEL If heavy engine knock is detected when using
• Unleaded fuel is essential for proper the recommended octane rated fuel, or if steady
operation of the emission control engine knocking is present while maintaining a
system. steady speed on level roads, contact your
Dealer for advice.
Caution: DO NOT use leaded fuel. Your
engine is designed to use unleaded fuel Note: An occasional, light, engine knock while
ONLY. accelerating or climbing hills is acceptable.
• Even a very small quantity of leaded Octane enhancers
fuel will damage your vehicle's The use of octane enhancers is not
emission control system and could recommended and may invalidate the vehicle
invalidate the emissions warranty. In warranty.
addition, leaded fuel will damage the
Note: Reformulated gasoline and gasoline that
oxygen sensors in the fuel injection
contain detergents, anti-corrosion and stability
system and also seriously damage the
additives are recommended - they will help
catalyst in the catalytic converter.
your vehicle maintain the correct level of
Caution: DO NOT use fuel system cleaning emissions and engine performance.
agents, as many of these products can be
Driveability
harmful to gaskets and other materials
used in fuel system components. If you encounter driveability, starting and
stalling problems, especially in high ambient
temperatures or at high altitude when the
Octane requirements
engine is cold, it may be caused by poor quality
Caution: Using unleaded fuel with an octane fuel. Try an alternative brand and if the problem
rating lower than 91 can cause driveability persists, seek advice from your Dealer.
problems and a persistent, heavy engine
knock (a metallic rapping noise). If severe, Gasoline/oxygenated fuel blends
this can lead to engine damage. To avoid invalidating the vehicle warranty, use
Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI ONLY fuels blended within the following limits:
octane rating of 91 or higher should be used. • Up to 15% of Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
Note: Federal law requires that gasoline octane (MTBE) and unleaded fuel mix.
ratings be posted on the pumps. The Cost of • Up to 15% of Ethyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
Living Council (CLC) octane rating or Anti (ETBE) and unleaded fuel mix.
Knock Index (AKI) octane rating shown is an • Up to 10% of Ethanol (Ethyl or grain
average of Research Octane Number (RON) and alcohol) and unleaded fuel mix.
Motor Octane Number (MON).

153
L

Fuel and Refuelling


Methanol/unleaded fuel blends EMPTY FUEL TANK
WARNING Caution: DO NOT run the fuel tank dry.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury and Running the fuel tank dry could create an
even death if misused. engine misfire capable of damaging the
engine, the catalytic converter or the fuel
Methanol/unleaded fuel blends, even in small
pump.
amounts, can cause blindness and possible
death if swallowed. Additionally, take Note: Should the vehicle run out of fuel it will be
precautions to prevent methanol from coming necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres (1
into contact with the skin. Gallon) of fuel in order to restart the vehicle. In
some circumstances it will be necessary to
In some areas, it is possible to buy unleaded drive a short distance, typically 1.6 - 5
fuel that is blended with up to 5% Methanol kilometers (1 - 3 miles) in order for the vehicles
(Methyl or wood alcohol) and cosolvents and monitoring systems to register the additional
corrosion preventatives. Using these blends fuel.
can cause driveability problems and damage FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
the fuel system components. Their use may
also invalidate the vehicle warranty. In the event of an accident, the Supplementary
WHEREVER POSSIBLE, AVOID USING FUEL Restraint System (air bag system) may stop the
CONTAINING METHANOL! operation of the fuel pump, depending on the
severity and type of the impact.
FUEL FILLING If this happens, the system must be reset
before attempting to restart the engine.
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to fill the tank beyond its Resetting the fuel cut-off system
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is parked on
a slope, in direct sunlight or high ambient WARNING
temperature, expansion of the fuel can cause To avoid the possibility of fire or personal
a spillage. injury, do not reset the Fuel Cut-off System if
you see or smell fuel.
Gas station pumps are equipped with automatic
cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage. Fill the If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as
tank SLOWLY until the filler nozzle follows:
automatically cuts-off the supply. 1. Turn the starter switch to position 0 and
The reduced diameter filler neck accepts ONLY wait for 1 minute.
a narrow filler nozzle of the type found on 2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
pumps that supply UNLEADED fuel. wait for 30 seconds.
Note: Ensure the filler cap is fitted correctly 3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
after refuelling.Tighten the cap until it clicks 3 4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
times. normal.

154
R

Park Distance Control


Park Distance Control

USING PARK DISTANCE Park Distance Control (PDC) is a system that


CONTROL (PDC) assists the driver when manoeuvering the
vehicle into a parking space, or anywhere that
Caution: The Park Distance Control is a there are obstacles that need to be avoided,
parking aid for guidance only. It remains the warning the driver accordingly.
driver’s responsibility to detect obstacles and
estimate the vehicle’s distance from them. The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic sensors
The sensors may not be able to detect certain on each of the bumpers. (Some vehicles are
types of obstruction (narrow posts or small fitted with sensors only in the rear bumpers.)
narrow objects, small objects close to the The range of the front sensors, and the two
ground and some objects with dark, sensors on the corners of the rear bumper is
non-reflective surfaces, for example). Always approximately 0.6 metres (2 feet). The two
be vigilant when reversing. center rear sensors have a range of
Caution: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
and snow. If deposits build up on the surface PDC in operation
of the sensors, their performance may be
Caution: PDC is automatically switched off at
impaired. When washing the vehicle, avoid
the rear when a trailer is attached to the
aiming high pressure jets directly at the
vehicle.
sensors at close range.
The distance from an obstruction is identified
by an intermittent tone sounding (higher pitch
for the front sensors and a lower pitch for the
rear). As the vehicle moves closer to an
obstruction, the repetition frequency of the
tones increases proportionally.
When the distance between the sensor and the
obstruction is less than approximately 0.30
metres (1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.

LAN0243G

155
L

Park Distance Control


Activating PDC If a long, high-pitched tone sounds and the
PDC is automatically activated whenever R switch indicator flashes when PDC is activated,
(Reverse) is engaged, while the starter switch is then a fault in the system has been detected -
turned on. first check that the sensors on the bumpers are
not obscured by dirt, ice or snow. If the fault
If R is selected, both front and rear sets of
persists after cleaning the sensors, contact
sensors become activated and a short
your Land Rover Dealer for assistance.
confirmation tone sounds after one second.
In R, the sensors remain on regardless of
speed.
If the driver selects Neutral N from Reverse R,
both sets of sensors remain active.
Selection of Park P, or applying the EPB while
the vehicle is stationary, will override other
inputs and turn off the PDC system.

2
LAN0244G 3

PDC is automatically cancelled when D (Drive)


is selected and the vehicle exceeds 16 km/h (10
mph). When driving into a limited space, front
PDC can be enabled manually.
Front PDC can be manually selected or
deselected by pressing the switch (illustrated)
on the center front instrument panel. The
switch indicator illuminates and a short tone
sounds as confirmation.
Note: The confirmation tone only sounds when
the rear PDC is activated by selecting reverse,
or when the system is re-activated by pressing
the switch.

156
R

Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USE • DO NOT allow the vehicle to remain
Automatic Transmission

stationary for any length of time with a


WARNING drive gear selected and the engine running
To reduce the risk of inadvertent vehicle (always select N if the engine is to idle for a
movement when parked, always leave the prolonged period).
vehicle with the gear selector in P (Park)
position, as well as applying the parkbrake.

Starting
The engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions.
• ALWAYS apply the parkbrake and foot
brake before starting the engine.
• KEEP THE BRAKES APPLIED while moving
the selector lever into a drive position (the
selector lever cannot be moved from the P
or N position unless the foot brake is
applied).
Note: If pressure is applied to the selector lever
before the foot brake is applied, any gear LAN0245G
selected may not be available irrespective of the
lever position. In this situation, remove Note: The gear selector lever MUST be in the P
pressure from the selector lever, ensure that position before the starter key can be removed.
the foot brake is applied and select the required Note: For maximum air conditioning
gear. performance while stationary, select P or N.
• The selector release button (see inset)
must be pressed while selecting P and R,
and also to enable the lever to be moved
between the P and R positions.
• DO NOT rev the engine or allow it to run
above normal idle speed while selecting D
or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with
any gear selected.
• ALWAYS keep the brakes applied until you
are ready to move off - remember, once a
drive gear has been selected, an automatic
vehicle will tend to creep forward (or
backward if reverse is selected).

157
L

Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION P - Park
Selector lever positions This position locks the transmission and should
be selected before switching the engine off. To
WARNING avoid transmission damage, ensure that the
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle is completely stationary, with the
vehicle, especially with keys in the starter parkbrake applied, before selecting P.
switch.
The selector release button MUST be pressed
Select P and shut off the engine prior to before moving the selector lever into, or out of,
exiting the vehicle. the P position.

Caution: DO NOT select P or R if the vehicle is R - Reverse


moving. Before selecting Reverse, ensure that the
DO NOT select a forward drive gear when the vehicle is stationary, with the foot brake
vehicle is moving backwards. applied. The selector release button MUST be
pressed before moving the selector lever into
DO NOT select reverse gear when the vehicle Reverse position.
is moving forwards.
N - Neutral
An LED indicator on the selector panel and a
number or letter on the gear selector display in Select Neutral when the vehicle is stationary
the instrument pack, identify the selected gear and the engine is required to idle for a brief
position. period (at traffic lights, for example). In Neutral,
the transmission is not locked, so the parkbrake
must be applied whenever N is selected.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in Neutral and it is then
necessary to depress the foot brake pedal in
order to release the selector lever.
Press the selector release button and foot brake
to move from Neutral to Reverse or Drive.
D - Drive
Select for all normal driving; full automatic gear
changing occurs on all six forward gears,
according to road speed and accelerator
position.

LAN0246G

158
R

Automatic Transmission
Kick-down in automatic mode Sport mode
To provide rapid acceleration, e.g. for In Sport mode, full automatic progression
overtaking, push the accelerator pedal to the through the gear ratios is retained and the
full extent of its travel (this is known as transmission will stay in the lower gears for
kick-down), a click will be felt through the longer. This improves mid-range performance
accelerator pedal. Up to a certain speed, this with downshifts occurring more readily.
will cause an immediate downshift to the lowest
appropriate gear, followed by rapid
acceleration. Once the pedal is relaxed, normal
gear change speeds will resume (dependent
upon road speed and accelerator pedal
position).
Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also
result in a downshift in the transmission,
depending on vehicle speed.

LAN0247G

To select Sport mode, move the gear lever from


the D position towards the left hand side of the
vehicle (see illustration). The word SPORT will
appear in the gear selector display in the
instrument pack (for approximately 6 seconds)
and the LED in the selector display to the side
of the selector lever (arrowed in inset)
illuminates.
Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by
returning the lever to the D position.
To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
has been selected move the selector into the D
position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
Note: Sport mode will be available only with
Terrain Response Special Programs off. i.e the
rotary knob is not in the raised position.

159
L

Automatic Transmission
CommandShift TM 4. To deselect CommandShift, simply move
CommandShift gear selection can be used as the selector lever sideways, back to the D
an alternative to fully automatic transmission position. Automatic gear changing will then
and is particularly effective when rapid resume.
acceleration or engine braking are required. Note: In CommandShift, kick-down is still
available for increased acceleration. See
Kick-down in automatic mode, 159.
Note: When the Terrain Response system is
used, the automatic transmission will go
straight into CommandShift if the lever is
moved into Sport/CommandShift in any Special
Program.
Using CommandShift in HIGH range
If CommandShift is selected in HIGH range, 1st
gear must be selected to move off from
stationary. Normal sequential gear changing
can be utilised once the vehicle is moving.
Using CommandShift in LOW range
If CommandShift is selected in LOW range, the
LAN0248G
vehicle can move off from stationary in 1st, 2nd
1. With D selected, move the gear selector or 3rd gear - this is particularly useful to
from the D position towards the left-hand improve traction when driving off-road.
side of the vehicle. Kick-down in CommandShift
2. The transmission then automatically When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
selects the ratio most appropriate to the the manual gear selection, to provide increased
vehicle's road speed and accelerator acceleration.
position. Move the selector forward (+) or In HIGH range, with CommandShift selected,
backward (-) and release will manually kick-down will cause a downshift to the lowest
select a higher or lower gear (when gear possible for the current vehicle speed.
available). The message TRANSMISSION
COMMANDSHIFT SELECTED appears in
the main message center.
3. A single forward (+) movement and release
of the selector lever will change the
transmission to a higher gear, while
rearward (-) movement and release of the
lever will change down to a lower gear. The
selected gear will be indicated in the gear
selector display in the instrument pack (see
inset).

160
R

Automatic Transmission
ELECTRONICALLY SELECTED High coolant temperature mode
AUTOMATIC MODES In high ambient temperatures during extreme
In automatic or Sport modes (not available in load conditions, it is possible for the engine and
CommandShift), the transmission control the gearbox to overheat. At a certain
system will electronically adjust gear change temperature the transmission will select a gear
points to suit a variety of driving conditions. change pattern designed to aid the cooling
process, whilst enabling the gearbox to
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude mode continue performing normally in high
A suitable gear change pattern is selected to temperatures.
retain lower gears for longer. This is to counter Note: When the Terrain Response system is
momentum loss caused by more frequent gear used, automatic transmission change
changing during hill ascent or when towing. points/patterns will change depending on
This gear change pattern is also selected at high which mode has been selected.
altitudes to combat reduced engine torque.
Limp-home mode
Hill descent mode Should the transmission develop a fault, F is
When in manual CommandShift mode, with the displayed in the gear position display and only
optimum gear for engine braking selected, the limited gears are available. Seek immediate
selector lever can then be moved across to the assistance from your Land Rover Dealer.
D position. The transmission will retain the
previously selected manual gear until the
descent is completed, then the transmission
will automatically change to D.

161
L

Transfer Gearbox
Transfer Gearbox

TRANSFER GEARBOX
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled transfer gearbox allowing the driver
to select HIGH or LOW range driving gears.
HIGH range
HIGH range should be used for all normal road
driving and also for off-road driving across dry,
level terrain.
LOW range
LAN0249G
LOW range should ONLY be used in situations
where low speed manoeuvering is necessary, While the vehicle is in HIGH range, the range
such as reversing a trailer or negotiating a indicator in the instrument pack display is
boulder-strewn river bed, or when moving off extinguished and the HIGH range indicator at
while heavily loaded or towing. the switch is illuminated.
Also use LOW range for more extreme off-road The range indicator in the instrument pack
conditions, such as steep ascents and display illuminates continuously to act as a
descents. DO NOT attempt to use the LOW reminder that LOW range is engaged. It flashes
range for normal road driving. to indicate a range change in progress and
extinguishes once the vehicle is in HIGH range.
Using the transfer gearbox
The recommended method of changing range
is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles
equipped with a message center, the messages
displayed will assist the experienced driver in
carrying out a range change on-the-move.
See RANGE CHANGING ON THE MOVE, 164.
Stationary method
With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, apply the foot brake and move the
automatic gearbox selector to N (neutral).
Press the transfer gear switch to select HIGH or
LOW and release it.

162
R

Transfer Gearbox

LAN0264G LAN0265G

While a HIGH to LOW range change is in While a LOW to HIGH range change is in
progress, the HIGH range indicator in the progress, the LOW range indicator in the switch
switch will remain illuminated. The LOW range will remain illuminated. The HIGH range
indicators in both the switch and the instrument indicators in both the switch and the instrument
pack display will flash. pack display will flash.
When the range change is complete, the HIGH When the range change is complete, the LOW
range indicator in the switch extinguishes. The range indicators in both the switch and the
LOW range indicators in both the switch and instrument pack display extinguishes. The
the instrument pack display will illuminate HIGH range indicator in the switch will
constantly. illuminate constantly.
A warning chime will sound, and LOW RANGE A warning chime will sound, and HIGH RANGE
ENGAGED is displayed in the main message ENGAGED is displayed in the main message
center for a few seconds. center for a few seconds.

163
L

Transfer Gearbox
RANGE CHANGING ON THE MOVE Transmission fault message
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a If a fault occurs within the transmission, a
range change is requested, a warning chime message will be displayed in the main message
sounds and SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE center.
CHANGE appears in the main message center. See MESSAGE CENTER - MESSAGES, 89.
If N is not selected before using the transfer AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
gear switch, the message SELECT NEUTRAL
Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment,
FOR RANGE CHANGE is displayed and a
such as roller generators, that are driven by
warning chime sounds.
only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
Note: Do not attempt to make moving range will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less.
Changing from HIGH to LOW on the move
With the vehicle slowing down and travelling
NO FASTER THAN 40 km/h (24 mph), first
select N in the main gearbox. Press the rear of
the transfer gear switch to the LOW position
and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the Stationary method.
Now select D or manual CommandShiftTM
mode. The transmission interlock prevents the
engagement of a drive gear until the range
change is complete.
Changing from LOW to HIGH on the move
Caution: If the range change indicator still
flashes when the starter key is turned from
position ll to position l, apply the parkbrake.
With the vehicle travelling NO FASTER THAN
60 km/h (38 mph), select N in the main
gearbox. Press the front of the transfer gear
switch to the HIGH position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select D (drive). The transmission
interlock prevents the engagement of a drive
gear until the range change is complete.

164
R

Cruise Control
Cruise Control

CRUISE CONTROL Note: Cruise control is NOT available when the


vehicle is being driven in LOW range.
Caution: Always observe the following
precautions: It is also not available when using the Terrain
Response system, when Mud Ruts, Sand or
• DO NOT use cruise control in traffic
Rock Crawl is selected and also when Hill
conditions where a constant speed cannot
Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
easily be maintained.
• DO NOT use cruise control on winding or To operate
slippery road surfaces, or in off-road Accelerate until the desired cruising speed is
conditions such as rough tracks or on reached. This must be above the system's
sand. operational minimum speed of 30 km/h
• Use of Sport mode is not recommended (18 mph).
when cruise control is selected. Press the + switch (4) to set the vehicle speed
Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a in the system's memory. Cruise control will
constant road speed without using the now maintain that road speed.
accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for The warning indicator in the
highway cruising or for any journey where a instrument pack illuminates. With
constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy cruise control operating, speed can
period. be increased by normal use of the accelerator
e.g. for overtaking. When the accelerator is
released, road speed will return to the
previously set cruising speed.
4 Note: When cruise control speed is set and the
3 accelerator pedal is pressed for more than 60
seconds, cruise control will be cancelled.
2
1

LAN0252G

The steering wheel switches operate as follows:


1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing
memorised speed.
2. RESUME: Resume set speed.
3. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease.
4. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase.

165
L

Cruise Control
A speed can be stored whilst the vehicle speed Increasing the set cruising speed
is below 30 km/h (18 mph), or the vehicle is
stationary with the gear selector in D or N. Once WARNING
the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18 mph) When setting cruise control to the speed limit
the set speed can be achieved by pressing the it is important to remember that it is possible
resume switch (2). for the vehicle speed to increase when
travelling downhill. This may result in the
Suspending cruise control vehicle speed exceeding the speed limit.
Cruise control can be suspended by a single The driver must ALWAYS ensure that a safe
press of the CANCEL switch (1). The warning speed is maintained below the speed limit,
indicator in the instrument pack extinguishes. taking account of traffic and road conditions.
Cruise control will also suspend when the brake
pedal is pressed, when the gear selector is Press and hold the + switch (4); the vehicle will
moved into neutral or if HDC or DSC becomes accelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
active. desired speed is reached.
To resume cruise control at the previously set The vehicle speed at the point of switch release
speed, press the RESUME switch (2). becomes the new set speed.
Note: The set speed will NOT be erased by Alternatively, the set speed can be increased
pressing the CANCEL switch (1). The set speed incrementally by tapping the + switch (4). Each
will only be erased when the starter switch is press of the switch will increase the speed by
turned to position 0, or the gear selector lever 2 km/h (1 mph).
is moved to R or P. A further alternative is to increase speed by
Reducing the cruise speed normal use of the accelerator. When the desired
Press and hold the - switch (3); the vehicle will speed is reached, press the + switch (4) to set
decelerate. Release the switch as soon as the the cruise control.
desired speed is reached. The vehicle speed at Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed to
the point of switch release becomes the new set increase speed, but the + switch (4) is not
speed. pressed, cruise control will be cancelled after
Alternatively, the set speed can be decreased 60 seconds.
incrementally by tapping the - switch. Each
press of the switch will decrease the speed by
2 km/h (1 mph).

166
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)


WARNING
ACC is not a collision warning or avoidance
system. Additionally, ACC will not detect:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below
10 km/h (6 mph).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

A radar sensor, mounted in the front bumper,


projects a beam directly forward to detect
objects ahead.
ACC utilises this radar sensor to maintain a gap
between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead. The
LAN0253G
gap can be adjusted to one of four distance
settings to suit your driving style. If there is no • Only use ACC when conditions are
vehicle ahead within radar range, a set road favourable, that is, straight, dry, open
speed can be maintained. Any speed between roads with light traffic.
30 km/h (18 mph) and 180 km/h (110 mph) can
• Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
be stored in the ACC memory.
fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
When ACC is active, a set gap can be
• Do not use on icy or slippery roads.
maintained behind a leading vehicle even if your
stored speed is higher. If the road situation • It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
allows you to move into an adjacent lane, your drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
vehicle will automatically accelerate up to your at all times.
stored speed as long as there is no vehicle • Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt,
ahead within radar range. metal badges or objects, including vehicle
In a situation where your set gap is reduced by front protectors, which may prevent the
a slowing lead vehicle, ACC will automatically sensor from operating.
apply the brakes to re-establish the gap. • Do not use ACC when entering or leaving a
highway.

167
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Steering wheel switches Setting a speed
The system is operated by switches mounted Accelerate as normal until the required speed is
on the steering wheel. The driver can also reached.
intervene at any time by use of the foot brake or Press the SET + button (4) briefly and the
accelerator pedals. vehicle speed will then be stored in the memory
and the system activated. The set speed will be
displayed on the message center, e.g. SET
6 SPEED 80KM/H 50MPH.
5 Entering the follow mode

WARNING
4
When in follow mode the vehicle will not
3
decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will
the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
2 to avoid a collision without driver
1 intervention.

LAN0254G
Once a set speed has been selected, the driver
can release the accelerator and the set road
The steering wheel switches operate as follows: speed will be maintained.
1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or a
memorised speed. slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane and
2. RESUME: Resume set speed. travelling in the same direction, the vehicle
3. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease. speed will be adjusted automatically until the
gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds to the
4. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase. preset gap. The vehicle is now in follow mode.
5. GAP <---> : Gap increase. The warning indicator in the
6. GAP <-> : Gap decrease. instrument cluster will be
illuminated.

CRUISE GAP The message center will


<-->
display the gap set.

168
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


The vehicle will maintain the constant time gap Low speed automatic switch off
to the vehicle ahead until: If the speed of the vehicle decreases below
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed 30 km/h (18 mph), the ACC system will be
above the set speed. automatically switched OFF and the instrument
• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out warning indicator will go out.
of view. If the brakes were being applied by the ACC
• The vehicle ahead slows so that low speed system, they will be slowly released.
automatic switch off occurs. This will be accompanied by an audible
• A new gap distance is set. warning, and DRIVER INTERVENE will be
displayed on the message center. The driver
If necessary, the vehicle brakes will be must take control.
automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain the gap to the vehicle in front. Overriding the set speed/follow mode
The maximum braking which is applied by the WARNING
ACC system is limited and can be overridden by Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
the driver applying the brakes, if required. depressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC
Note: Driver braking will cancel ACC. will not automatically apply the brakes to
If the ACC system predicts that its maximum maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
braking level will not be sufficient, then an
audible warning will sound while the ACC The set speed and gap can be overridden by
continues to brake. DRIVER INTERVENE will be pressing the accelerator pedal when cruising at
displayed on the message center. The driver constant speed or in follow mode. If the vehicle
should take IMMEDIATE action. is in follow mode, the instrument warning
indicator will go out when the ACC is overridden
When in follow mode the vehicle will
by the driver using the accelerator and CRUISE
automatically return to the set speed when the
OVERRIDE will be displayed on the message
road ahead is clear, for instance when:
center. When the accelerator is released the
• The vehicle in front accelerates or changes ACC function will operate again and vehicle
lane. speed will decrease to the set speed, or a lower
• The driver changes lane to either side or speed if follow mode is active.
enters an exit lane.
The driver should intervene if appropriate.

169
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Adjusting the gap Adjusting the set speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the required speed
and press the SET + button (4).
• Increase or decrease the speed by pressing
and holding either the SET + or - button (4)
or (3) until the required set speed is shown
on the message center. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in steps of
LAN0256G
2 km/h (1 mph) by briefly pressing the SET
+ or - button (4) or (3).
ACC operates between approximately 30 km/h
CRUISE GAP
<-> and 180 km/h (18 mph and 110 mph)
dependent on the country specification.
CRUISE GAP Set speeds outside this range will not be
<-->
captured.
CRUISE GAP The ACC may apply the brakes to slow down the
<--->
vehicle to the new set speed. The new set speed
will be displayed on the message center for four
CRUISE GAP
<----> seconds after it has been changed.

EXT 23 C

TRIP 274.5 km
LAN0257G

The gap from the vehicle ahead can be


decreased or increased by pressing the rocker
switch (5) or (6), on the steering wheel.
Four gaps are available and the selected gap
setting will be displayed on the message center
when either button is pressed. After the starter
switch is turned ON the default gap will be
automatically selected ready for ACC operation.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a
gap appropriate to the driving conditions.

170
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


ACC automatic switch off Forward alert
ACC will disengage, but not clear the memory Limited warning of vehicles ahead is provided
when: during ACC operation by the ACC DRIVER
• The CANCEL button (1), is pressed. INTERVENE warning. The forward alert feature
additionally provides warnings whilst ACC is
• The brake pedal is pressed.
not engaged; if a vehicle is detected close
• The vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h (18 ahead, then the warning tone and message will
mph). be issued. The brakes will not be applied.
• N is selected.
• Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) activates.
• Electronic Traction Control (ETC) activates.
• Hill Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
ACC will disengage, and clear the memory
when:
• The starter switch is set to position 0. LAN0255G

• Maximum vehicle speed is reached.


This additional feature may be switched on or
• A fault occurs in the ACC system. off using the forward alert switch as indicated.
Resuming the set speed/follow mode When the indicator in the switch is on, forward
Caution: RESUME should only be used if the alert is active.
driver is aware of the set speed and intends to The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:
return to it. • Press the gap decrease button when ACC is
By pressing the resume button (2), after ACC disengaged to display and then decrease
has been cancelled, for example, after braking, the sensitivity of the alert.
the ACC will become active again provided that • Press the gap increase button to display
the set speed memory has not been erased. The and then increase the sensitivity of the
set speed will be displayed for four seconds and alert.
the original set speed will be resumed, unless a
Both of these alerts are accompanied by the
vehicle ahead causes the follow mode to
FWD ALERT <----> message in the message
become active.
center.

171
L

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Driving with ACC active
FWD ALERT The system acts by regulating the speed of the
<-> vehicle using engine control and the brakes.
Gear changes may occur in response to
FWD ALERT
<-->
deceleration or acceleration whilst in ACC.
ACC is not a collision avoidance system,
FWD ALERT however, during some situations the system
<--->
may provide the driver with an indication that
FWD ALERT
intervention is required.
<----> An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by
the message DRIVER INTERVENE if the ACC
EXT 72 F detects:
• A failure has occurred whilst the system is
TRIP 134.5 MILES active.
LAN0260N • That using maximum ACC braking only is
not sufficient.
• That the vehicle speed has decreased
below the minimum for ACC operation.
Note:
• ACC operates when the gear selector lever
is in position D.
• When engaged, the accelerator pedal rests
in the raised position. Fully release the
pedal to allow normal ACC operation.
• When braking is applied by the ACC the
brake pedal may move down and up as
braking is applied or removed. The vehicle
brake lamps will be switched on while
braking is applied.

172
R

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Detection limitations ACC failure
If a fault occurs during operation of the system
1 in cruise or follow modes, the ACC system will
switch OFF and cannot be used until the fault is
cleared. The message DRIVER INTERVENE
appears briefly, and is then replaced by the
message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE.
If failure of the ACC or any related system
2
occurs at any other time the message CRUISE
NOT AVAILABLE will be displayed. It will not be
possible to activate the ACC system in any
mode.
3 Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the
sensor or cover may inhibit ACC operation.
Fitting of a vehicle front protector or metallised
badges may also affect ACC operation.
If this occurs in ACC cruise/follow mode, the
audible alarm sounds and the message DRIVER
LAN0250G
INTERVENE appears briefly. The message ACC
SENSOR BLOCKED is then displayed. The
Detection limitations can occur: system is no longer active.
1. When driving on a different line to the Clearing the obstruction allows the system to
vehicle in front. return to normal operation. If the obstruction is
2. With vehicles which edge into your lane present when ACC is inactive, e.g. on initial
which can only be detected once they have starting or with the ACC system switched off,
moved fully into your lane. the message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will be
3. There may be issues with the detection of displayed.
vehicles in front when going into and Tires other than those recommended may have
coming out of a bend. different sizes. This can affect the correct
In these cases ACC may brake late or operation of the ACC.
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.

173
L

Brakes
Brakes

FOOT BRAKE Servo assistance


The braking system is servo assisted, but ONLY
WARNING when the engine is running. Without this
DO NOT rest your foot on the brake pedal assistance greater braking effort is necessary to
while travelling as this may overheat the safely control the vehicle, resulting in longer
brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause stopping distances. Always observe the
excessive wear. following precautions:
NEVER allow the vehicle to freewheel with the • ALWAYS take particular care when being
engine turned off as full braking assistance towed with the engine turned off.
will not be available. The brakes will still
• If the engine should stop for any reason
function, but more pressure will be required
while the vehicle is in motion, bring the
to operate them.
vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
If the RED brake warning indicator should conditions safely allow, and DO NOT pump
illuminate while the vehicle is in motion, the brake pedal as the braking system may
bring the vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic lose any remaining assistance available.
conditions and safety allow and seek
qualified assistance before continuing. Brake pads
See Warning Indicators, 100. Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
NEVER place non-approved floor matting or the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
any other obstructions under the brake pedal. situations where heavy braking is required.
This restricts pedal travel and braking Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
efficiency. that the brake pads are examined for wear and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
The hydraulic braking system operates through and optimum performance.
dual circuits. If one circuit should fail, the other
Wet conditions
will continue to function.
Driving through water or even very heavy rain
However, in the event of brake failure where
may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
only one circuit is operational, the vehicle
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
should only be driven at slow speed to the
application of the brakes, first ensuring that you
nearest Land Rover Dealer.
are at a safe distance from other road users.
In these circumstances, exercise extreme
caution and be aware that increased brake
pedal travel, greater pedal pressure, and longer
stopping distances will be experienced.

174
R

Brakes
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES (ABS) No matter how hard you brake, you should be
able to continue steering the vehicle as normal.
WARNING • DO NOT pump the brake pedal at any time;
ABS cannot overcome the physical limitations this will interrupt operation of the system
of braking distance, or the danger of and may increase the stopping distance.
aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water
prevents adequate contact between the tires • NEVER place additional floor matting or
and the road surface. any other obstruction under the brake
pedal. This restricts pedal travel and may
The fact that a vehicle is fitted with ABS must impair brake efficiency.
never tempt the driver into taking risks that
could affect safety. In all cases, it remains the Warning indicator
driver's responsibility to drive within A fault with the ABS system is
reasonable safety margins, having due indicated by illumination of the
consideration for prevailing weather and amber ABS warning indicator. If
traffic conditions. the indicator illuminates, drive with care,
The driver should always take account of the avoiding heavy brake applications and seek
surface to be travelled over and the fact that qualified assistance urgently. See Anti-lock
brake pedal reactions will be different to Braking System (ABS) - AMBER, 104.
those experienced on a non-ABS vehicle.

The purpose of the anti-lock braking system


(ABS) is to allow efficient braking without wheel
locking - thereby, dependent upon road
conditions, allowing the driver to retain steering
control of the vehicle.
Under normal braking conditions, where
sufficient road surface friction exists to slow
the vehicle without the wheels locking, ABS will
not be activated. However, if the wheels begin
to lock under braking, then ABS will
automatically come into operation. This will be
recognisable by a rapid pulsation felt through
the brake pedal.
In an emergency situation, ABS functions most
effectively when full braking effort is applied
even when the road surface is slippery. The ABS
system constantly monitors the speed of each
wheel and varies the brake pressure to each,
according to the available grip.

175
L

Brakes
Off-road driving Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
While anti-lock braking will operate in off-road If rapid full brake application is made, EBA
driving conditions, on certain surfaces total automatically boosts the braking force to the
reliance on the system may be unwise. It cannot maximum and helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if
reliably compensate for driver error or the driver brakes more slowly, but with
inexperience on difficult off-road surfaces. sufficient brake pressure to activate ABS on
Note the following: both front wheels, the system automatically
increases the braking force so that all four
• On soft or deep surfaces such as powdery
wheels are in ABS control, optimising the
snow, sand or gravel, and on extremely
performance of the ABS system.
rough ground, the braking distance
required by the anti-lock braking system Pressure should be maintained on the brake
may be greater than for normal braking, pedal during the entire brake application. If the
even though improved steering would be brake pedal is released, EBA will cease
experienced. This is because the natural operation.
action of locked wheels on soft surfaces is A fault with the EBA system is indicated by
to build up a wedge of surface material in illumination of the amber brake warning
front which assists the wheels to stop. indicator. See INDICATOR GROUPING, 100.
• If the vehicle is stopped on a very steep In the event of a fault, the system should be
slope where little traction is available, it checked by a Land Rover Dealer at the earliest
may slide with the wheels locked as there is opportunity.
no wheel rotation to provide a signal to the
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD)
ABS. To counteract this, briefly release the
brakes to permit some wheel movement, Your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Brake
then re-apply the brakes to allow ABS to Distribution (EBD), which balances the
gain control. distribution of braking forces between front and
rear axles to maintain maximum braking
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) efficiency under all vehicle loading conditions.
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) is an advanced For example; under light loads EBD applies less
form of ABS, which maintains vehicle stability effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
and steerability during braking whilst cornering stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
or changing lanes at speed. to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
is heavily laden.
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, gently stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and seek qualified assistance.

176
R

Brakes
PARKBRAKE (EPB) If the system detects a fault with the parkbrake,
the amber parkbrake warning indicator will
WARNING illuminate and the message PARKBRAKE
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold FAULT will appear on the instrument pack. If a
the vehicle stationary if the amber parkbrake fault is detected while EPB is operated, the red
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the warning indicator will flash and the amber
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek indicator will illuminate. Also the message
qualified assistance urgently. PARKBRAKE FAULT. SYSTEM NOT
FUNCTIONAL will appear in the main message
Caution: Driving the vehicle with the center. The red indicator will continue to be
parkbrake applied (other than in the illuminated for at least ten seconds after the
emergency situation described above) or starter switch has been switched off.
repeated use of the parkbrake to decelerate
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the Dynamic operation
brake system. Caution: Driving the vehicle with the
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrically parkbrake applied or repeated use of the
operated parkbrake (EPB). parkbrake to decelerate the vehicle may
cause serious damage to the brake system.
In an emergency, the parkbrake can be applied
1 dynamically, i.e. with the vehicle travelling at
more than 3 km/h (2 mph). Pulling up on the
lever and holding it up gives a gradual reduction
in speed. The brake warning indicator will
illuminate accompanied by a harsh sound and
CAUTION! PARKBRAKE APPLIED appears in
2 the main message center. The stop lamps will
illuminate.
Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel the
parkbrake application.

LAN0261G

Applying the parkbrake manually


With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever (1)
and release it. The lever will return to the neutral
position and the red parkbrake warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate.
If the lever is operated while the vehicle is
travelling at less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the
vehicle will be brought to a stop abruptly. The
vehicle stop lamps will not illuminate.

177
L

Brakes
Releasing the parkbrake manually In the event of a fault, PARKBRAKE FAULT.
AUTO RELEASE NOT FUNCTIONAL will appear
WARNING in the main message center. In this event,
The parkbrake operates on the rear wheels of release the parkbrake manually.
the vehicle and hence secure parking of the
Under most conditions the EPB system will
vehicle is dependent on being on a hard and
release seamlessly as the accelerator is applied,
stable surface.
allowing the vehicle to move forward. However,
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake to operate release times may be extended for an initial
effectively if the vehicle has been subjected time period at the start of a journey when
to immersion in mud and water. changing into gear from P or N. This is normal
and is to allow for the extended gear
To disengage the parkbrake, the starter key engagement times that may occur under certain
must be in position I or II. Apply pressure to the circumstances.
foot brake while pressing down on the
If the vehicle is used in severe off-road
parkbrake lever.
conditions, such as wading, deep mud, etc.,
It is not possible to manually release the additional maintenance and adjustment of the
parkbrake without pressing the foot brake. parkbrake will be required. Consult your Land
If the parkbrake cannot be released manually, Rover Dealer.
seek qualified assistance immediately.
Fault management
Releasing the parkbrake automatically If a fault is diagnosed by the system when the
If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake starter is on but the parkbrake is not in use, the
applied and in D or R, pressing the accelerator amber parkbrake warning indicator will flash
will release the parkbrake and allow the vehicle and the message PARKBRAKE FAULT will be
to move off. displayed in the message center.
To delay the automatic release feature, hold the Note: Under some transmission fault
lever in the apply position, then at the desired conditions the parkbrake may not function, or
point, release it. may not operate automatically.
To assist in a smooth drive-away, the system
anticipates the requirement and reduces the
system load depending on the gradient. (It may
be possible to hear this pre-arm operation.)
If the reduction in load causes the vehicle to
move after a valid gear is engaged, the full
system load will be re-applied to the parkbrake.
This may cause a small reduction in the
refinement of the subsequent drive-away. It is
also possible to override this load reduction by
lifting the parkbrake lever after gear
engagement.

178
R

Dynamic Stability and Traction Control


Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

DYNAMIC STABILITY Deactivating DSC operation


CONTROL (DSC) Land Rover recommend that DSC is operational
in all normal driving conditions.
WARNING In some driving conditions, to maximise
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is unable to traction, it may be beneficial to deactivate DSC.
compensate for driver misjudgement. It Such conditions include:
remains the driver’s responsibility to adopt a
suitable driving style in every driving • To rock the vehicle out of a hollow or out of
situation. Risks should never be taken on a soft surface.
account of the additional security afforded by • Starting in deep snow or on a loose
the DSC system. surface.
• Driving in deep sand.
DSC helps to optimise dynamic stability, even
• Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal
in critical driving situations. The system
ruts.
controls dynamic stability when accelerating.
Additionally, it identifies unstable driving • Driving through deep mud.
behaviour, such as understeering and
oversteering and helps to keep the vehicle
under control by manipulating the engine
output and applying the brakes at individual
wheels. Some noise may be generated when
the brakes are applied. The system is ready to
operate each time the engine is started.
Warning indicator 2
LAN0262G 3
The indicator illuminates briefly as To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
a bulb and system check when the DSC switch on the instrument panel (the DSC
starter switch is turned to warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
position II. Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
If the warning indicator flashes, the system is control operation.
active, regulating engine output and brake Note: Driving with DSC deactivated, may add
forces. additional loads on the brakes - always drive
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does with DSC switched on if possible.
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
Reactivating DSC
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate DSC. Drive with care and To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
seek qualified assistance urgently. DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will
automatically reactivate when the engine is
started.
DSC is reactivated automatically when the
program is changed on the Terrain Response
system.

179
L

Dynamic Stability and Traction Control


ELECTRONIC TRACTION
CONTROL (ETC)
ETC is continuously available to boost vehicle
traction when one or more wheels has a
tendency to spin, while others do not. It
operates in conjunction with the DSC system.
If a wheel is spinning, ETC automatically brakes
that wheel until it regains grip. This braking
activity allows the engine power to be
transmitted to the remaining wheels. Some
noise may be generated when the brakes are
applied.
Warning indicator
A fault with the ETC system is
indicated by illumination of the
amber DSC warning indicator. This
could also indicate that the DSC has been
manually deactivated. See, INDICATOR
GROUPING, 100.
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate ETC. Drive with care and
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

180
R

Hill Descent Control


Hill Descent Control

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)


Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system
to provide greater control in off-road situations
particularly when descending severe gradients.
HDC is fully functional and should only be used
in first and reverse gears in HIGH range and all
gears in LOW range.
HDC is fully functional and should only be used
in D, R and CommandShift 1 in HIGH range and LAN0263G
in D, R and all CommandShift gears in LOW
range. When in D, the vehicle will automatically
To select HDC
select the most appropriate gear. The vehicle
should not be driven with the HDC active in N Press and release the switch (arrowed) to
neutral. select HDC. To deselect, press and release
again.
Note: Some of the Terrain response
program/range combinations will activate or The green information indicator will extinguish.
deactivate HDC automatically. If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating, the
system fades out, allowing the vehicle to
Warning indicator gradually increase in speed.
HDC can be selected at speeds When used in LOW range, HDC controls the
below 80 km/h (50 mph). The vehicle speed more aggressively. Use LOW
green warning indicator will range gears when steep descents are to be
illuminate continuously when vehicle speed attempted.
reduces below 50km/h (30mph) and full HDC
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
function is activated.
vehicle starter is switched off for more than 6
If the vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph), hours.
HDC will deselect and the green HDC indicator
will extinguish.
If HDC is already selected and vehicle speed
rises above 50 km/h (30 mph) in HIGH range,
HDC function is suspended and the green HDC
indicator will flash. A message will also appear
in the main message center.

181
L

Hill Descent Control


HDC in action When driving off-road, HDC can be
HDC should be used in conjunction with an permanently selected to ensure that control is
appropriate gear selection. maintained. ABS and ETC are still fully
operational and will assist if the need arises.
During a hill descent, if engine braking is
insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC Note: With HDC selected, gear changes can be
automatically operates the brakes to slow the carried out in the normal way.
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
position. perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
then released, HDC will recommence operating
at the speed at which the brakes were released.
1
In extreme circumstances, the HDC system
2 may cause brake temperatures to exceed their
pre-set limits. If this occurs, HDC
TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE SYSTEM
COOLING will be displayed in the message
center. HDC will then fade out and become
temporarily inactive. HDC will not be available
LAN0266G until the brakes reach an acceptable
temperature, at which time the warning
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed,
message will disappear from the message
descent speeds can be varied using the
center and HDC will, if required, resume
steering-wheel-mounted cruise control (1) +
operating.
and (2) - switches, where fitted. To reduce the
descent speed, press and hold the - switch. The If a fault is detected in the HDC system, HDC
vehicle speed at the point of switch release will FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in
become the new descent speed. the main message center. If the fault is detected
while the system is active, HDC will fade out. Do
To increase the descent speed, press and hold
not attempt a steep descent when HDC is
the + switch. The vehicle speed at the point of
unavailable or use a very low gear and/or the
switch release will become the new descent
foot brake. If a fault has been detected, consult
speed. Alternatively, the descent speed can be
your Land Rover Dealer at the earliest
adjusted by tapping the + or - switches. Each
opportunity.
press of the switch will adjust the descent
speed by approximately 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
Note: Each gear has a pre-defined minimum
descent speed.
Note: The descent speed will only increase if
the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the +
switch may result in no speed increase.

182
R

Hill Descent Control


HDC fade-out
HDC fade-out gradually decreases the HDC
function with the effect that the rate of hill
descent will increase. HDC will be disabled
completely once the descent is complete.
If required (e.g. the angle of the descent levels
out significantly), fade-out may be achieved
deliberately by deselecting HDC while the
system is operating.
HDC Information indicator - GREEN
If HDC is selected and the operating conditions
are met, the indicator will illuminate
continuously.
If the indicator flashes while HDC is active, HDC
operating conditions are not met .

183
L

Air Suspension
Air Suspension

AIR SUSPENSION Access height


The air suspension system maintains the WARNING
correct vehicle height by controlling the The driver should ensure that the vehicle is
quantity of air in the vehicle’s air springs. clear of obstacles and people before lowering
Unless stated otherwise, height changes may the vehicle. Remember that, for example, the
only be made while the engine is running and clearance under the floor and bumpers and in
the driver and passenger doors are closed. the wheel arches, will be 105 mm (4.1 in.)
When the air suspension system lifts the less at Access height than at Off-road height.
vehicle, it normally uses compressed air stored
in its reservoir. The suspension will rise much This is 50 mm (2.0 in.) lower than On-road
more slowly if this reservoir is depleted due to height. It provides easier entry, exit and loading
repeated raising and lowering of the of the vehicle.
suspension.
On-road height 55mm
The normal height for the vehicle.
Off-road height
0mm
This is 55 mm (2.2 in.) higher than On-road
height. It provides improved ground clearance
and approach, departure and break-over
angles. See DIMENSIONS, 292.
50mm
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up LAN0277G
to 40km/h (24 mph). When the system is at
Off-road height, the system will automatically Access height can be selected at any time, but
select On-road height if the vehicle speed the system response will depend on the
exceeds 50 km/h (30 mph). vehicle’s speed:
Note: When using Terrain Response, some of • If the vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h
its programs/range combinations will adjust (12 mph), the suspension will wait for up to
suspension height automatically. one minute for the vehicle to slow down. If
the vehicle does not slow down to below
Extended mode 20 km/h (12 mph) within this time, the
If the vehicle is grounded while at off-road Access height request will be cancelled.
height and traction control is induced, the • If the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h
system raises the vehicle by 35mm to clear the (12 mph), the suspension will move to a
obstruction. Extended mode is activated part-lowered height and remain at this
automatically and cannot be selected manually. height for up to one minute. If the vehicle
does not slow down to 8 km/h (5 mph)
within this time, the Access height request
will be cancelled.

184
R

Air Suspension
• If the vehicle speed is lower than 8 km/h Adjusting suspension heights
(5 mph), the suspension will be lowered to
Access height immediately. 2
Access height may be selected up to
40 seconds after the starter is turned off, 3
provided that the driver’s door has not been
opened within this time. 4
The suspension will automatically rise from 1
Access height when the vehicle speed exceeds 5
10 km/h (6 mph).
6
If Access height was selected directly from
Off-road height, the system will return to
Off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise the system will lift LAN0271G 7
the suspension to On-road height.
1. Raise/lower switch
High speed height
2. Raising indicator
This feature lowers the suspension ride height
by 20 mm if the vehicle exceeds 160 km/h 3. Off-road indicator
(100 mph) for longer than five seconds. This 4. On-road indicator
action is automatic and cannot be over-ridden. 5. Access indicator
Ride height will return to normal when vehicle
6. Lock indicator
speed remains below 130 km/h (80 mph) for 30
seconds. 7. Lowering indicator
Note: NEVER exceed the speed limits.
Crawl (locked at Access height)
This mode enables the vehicle to be driven at
low speeds at Access height to give increased
roof clearance in low car parks, etc.
Crawl can be selected when the vehicle speed is
below 35 km/h (22 mph), but will not be
activated until vehicle speed drops below
10 km/h (6 mph). When the vehicle is in Crawl,
On-road height will be selected automatically if
the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (24 mph).
Messages
The main message center displays messages
relating to the air suspension system.
See MAIN MESSAGE CENTER, 88.

185
L

Air Suspension
Suspension heights Selecting and cancelling Crawl (locked at
The raise/lower switch (1) is used to move up Access height)
or down through the suspension heights.
Indicators (3), (4) or (5) will be lit to show the
height selected. A message indicating the
suspension height will also be displayed in the
message center when Off-road, Access or
Crawl is selected.
Indicators (2) or (7) will be lit to show the 1
direction of movement. They extinguish when 5
the height change movement is completed.
6
If a height change is requested that is not
allowed, such as attempting to raise the height
of the vehicle with the engine not running,
indicators (2) and (7) will flash twice and a LAN0272G
chime will sound. A message will be displayed
on the message center. When the suspension is at On-road or Access
height and the vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
A flashing indicator (2) or (7) indicates that the (22 mph), press the raise/lower switch (1) in
system is in a waiting state or shows that it will the down direction for one second. Indicators
automatically override the driver’s choice if (5) and (6) will be lit to confirm the selection.
speed criteria are exceeded.
Crawl can be cancelled manually by pressing
Selecting Access height the raise/lower switch in the up direction for
If Access height is selected above 20 km/h one second. Indicator (6) will extinguish.
(12 mph), indicators (5) and (7) will flash while Note: When Crawl is cancelled, the suspension
the system waits for the vehicle to slow down. will rise to On-road height if the vehicle speed is
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).
(12 mph), indicator (4) will extinguish as the
Selecting Access height directly from Off-road
system goes to the part-lowered height.
height
indicator (5) will be lit and indicator (7) will
continue to flash. When the suspension is at Off-road height,
press switch (1) down, then press it again
When the vehicle slows down to 8 km/h before indicator (7) goes out.
(5 mph), indicators (5) and (7) will be lit. When
Access height is reached, indicator (7) will The system will remember to return the
extinguish. suspension to Off-road height automatically if
the vehicle is driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).

186
R

Air Suspension
Automatic height change warnings Door open override
If a door is opened during a height change while
the vehicle is at rest, the height change will be
restricted.
3

4 2
1
3

LAN0273G 7
When the suspension is at Off-road height,
Access or Crawl, the suspension height will
change automatically when vehicle speed LAN0274G 7
exceeds predetermined levels. The indicator for the target height (3, 4 or 5) will
When the suspension is at Off-road height or remain lit and the raising indicator (2) or the
Crawl, it warns the driver that the vehicle is lowering indicator (7) will flash.
approaching a speed threshold. A chime will The height change will resume if all of the doors
sound, a message will be displayed on the are closed within 90 seconds.
message center and the On-road indicator (4)
If the doors are not closed within this time, the
and either (2) or (7) will flash.
raising indicator (2) or the lowering indicator
The Off-road height speed warning is shown (7) will extinguish and the indicators showing
above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning the heights above and below the current
will disappear. position will be illuminated.
Selecting a new height using the raise/lower
switch (1), or driving off will reset the system.

187
L

Air Suspension
Extended mode Additional lift whilst in Extended mode
If the vehicle is grounded and traction control is When Extended Mode has been invoked and the
induced, the system raises the vehicle by automatic lifting of the vehicle has been
35 mm (1.4 in.) to clear the obstruction. completed, the driver can request an additional
Extended mode is activated automatically and lift in order to clear the obstacle. This can be
cannot be selected manually. particularly useful when Extended Mode has
been invoked on soft surfaces.
To request additional lifting wait for the raising
indicator (2) to extinguish, then press and hold
3 the switch (1) in the up direction for 3 seconds
whilst ALSO pressing the brake pedal. A chime
4
will sound to confirm that the request has been
1
accepted. The raising indicator (2) will be
5 illuminated while the vehicle is being lifted
Suspension freeze
If the system is attempting to change the
suspension height and it detects that the
suspension is prevented from moving, the
LAN0275G system will freeze all movements.
When Extended mode is activated, indicator (3) This can be caused by attempting to lower the
will flash if the suspension is above Off-road vehicle onto an obstacle or attempting to lift the
height. Indicators (3) and (4) will flash if the vehicle against an obstruction.
suspension is between Off-road and On-road The symbols operate in the same way as
heights. Indicators (4) and (5) will flash if the described in Extended mode and the same
suspension is between On-road and Access message will be displayed on the message
heights. A message will be displayed on the center. As in Extended mode, to exit this freeze
message center. state, either press the switch (1) up or down, or
To exit Extended mode, either press the drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 20
raise/lower switch (1) briefly up or down, or km/h (12 mph).
drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 5 km/h
(3 mph) for 30 seconds.

188
R

Air Suspension
Remote operation

WARNING
The remote control will operate effectively
from inside the vehicle. It is therefore
important to keep it out of reach of children at
all times.
When operating the remote control from 1
inside the passenger compartment, ensure
that the underside of the vehicle has been 2
checked for obstructions before lowering, and
that a responsible adult has been posted 3
outside the vehicle to supervise the lowering
process. LAN0276G

Care should be taken with all suspension To raise the vehicle, press and hold the Land
height changes when a trailer is attached to Rover button (3) and Lock button (1).
the vehicle. To lower the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button (3) and Unlock button (2).
The remote control is programmable to give a
range of functions. See REMOTE CONTROL If any button is released during the raising or
PROGRAMMING, 43. If the vehicle’s remote lowering of the suspension, all movement of
control has been configured to operate the air the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
suspension, height may be controlled remotely buttons are pressed again.
to assist in loading the vehicle or attaching a The height will initially change slowly but, after
trailer. three seconds, the speed will increase. While
After programming, to change the suspension the height is changing, a indicator on the
height via the remote control, remove the raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
starter key, turn on the hazard warning lamps direction of movement.
and close all doors. Remote operation is not If the starting height is above or below On-road
possible unless this is done. height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
Normal height control will resume when the
vehicle is driven away.
Note: Remote operation is disabled when the
vehicle is moving.

189
L

Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response

DYNAMIC RESPONSE If illumination occurs while driving, a fault with


the system is indicated, as follows:
Caution: If the warning indicator illuminates
RED a system fault has occurred that may • If the indicator shows RED (a flashing red
result in serious damage to vehicle indicator, which changes to constant
components. Stop the vehicle and switch off illumination after two minutes, and is
the engine as soon as safety permits. Seek accompanied by a warning chime):
qualified assistance immediately. This indicates a system fault that may
Dynamic Response is a patented feature unique result in serious damage to vehicle
to Land Rover. The system is designed to components and reduced Dynamic
eliminate vehicle body roll at low cornering Response performance. You must stop the
speeds and reduce body roll at higher cornering vehicle as soon as safety permits and
speeds, while maintaining a soft, car-like, switch off the engine. DO NOT CONTINUE
suspension for straight line travelling. On DRIVING! Seek qualified assistance
uneven surfaces and rough tracks, the Dynamic immediately
Response system will adjust the suspension • If the indicator shows AMBER (constant
according to the vehicle speed and roughness illumination):
of the surface to provide improved passenger This indicates a system fault that will result
comfort. in reduced Dynamic Response
At very low speeds the roll bars are effectively performance, but will not leave the vehicle
decoupled, giving significant benefits in in a dangerous condition. You may
off-road axle articulation and improved traction. continue driving, but reduce speed, take
The system is entirely automatic in operation additional care, and consult a Land Rover
and cannot be influenced by the driver in any Dealer at the earliest opportunity.
way. However, the functionality of the warning
indicator in the instrument panel is very
important and drivers should be aware of the
following:
Warning indicator
The warning indicator illuminates
RED when the starter switch is
turned to position II. After two
seconds, the RED illumination changes to
AMBER and, after a further two seconds, the
indicator extinguishes. This process is a
system check that takes place every time the
vehicle is used. Provided the Dynamic
Response system and Air Suspension system
are operating correctly, illumination will not
occur at any other time.

190
R

Terrain Response
Terrain Response

TERRAIN RESPONSE The suspension and drive systems comprising


TM
The Terrain Response system is permanently Terrain Response are:
active, continuously providing benefits in • Engine management
traction and driveability. These can be further • Gearbox management
enhanced for specific on and off-road driving
• Intelligent differential control
conditions by the selection of special
programs, using one simple driver interface. • Dynamic stability, traction control and HDC
systems
• Air suspension
The system will provide a variable accelerator
response, ranging from very cautious for
slippery conditions (where a large pedal
movement has only a small effect on engine
power) to very responsive (e.g. for sand, where
engine power is allowed to rise more quickly).
In addition, Terrain Response offers control of
systems that have previously not been
manually controllable.
Terrain Response is designed to benefit the
driver, regardless of the level of off-road driving
experience. The enhanced traction control
system, with the control of many system
LAN0278G
parameters through one simple driver input,
To raise the rotary control, press down on it coupled with specific advice from the message
lightly and release. To lower the rotary control, center, will aid drivers with limited off-road
press down until it clicks. Rotate the control to experience. Additionally, the system can
select the appropriate special program. back-up the skills of experienced drivers, who
This interface allows the driver to tell the vehicle will also benefit from the wider performance
what sort of terrain is to be driven over. Based envelope available through the special
on the selected special program, the system programs.
optimises the vehicle set-up for the prevailing Note: Since each Terrain Response special
conditions, providing the optimum in traction, program uses the optimum settings of each
driveability and vehicle composure. drive component - accelerator response,
The Terrain Response special programs suspension, transmission, etc. - relative to the
automatically bring in changes in vehicle drive terrain being driven over, it follows that
and suspension systems that have until now changing from one special program to another
been only individually and manually brings in a different set of criteria.
controllable by the driver.

191
L

Terrain Response
This means that, for instance, the engine revs In addition to the electronically controlled
produced by the current accelerator position center differential, fitted to the vehicle as
might increase or decrease slightly in the new standard, Terrain Response may also be
program, or the suspension could change optionally equipped with an electronically
height. The changes are not dramatic, but are controlled rear differential. The amount of slip
noticeable. allowed in the electronically controlled
To obtain the maximum benefits from the differentials will be optimised continuously,
system, it is suggested that you first try it out in both from the point of view of traction and
circumstances where any distraction will not vehicle stability.
affect other road users. Depending on the Terrain Response program
selected, the control of the differentials will vary
Using Terrain Response
to provide the optimum settings.
WARNING Note: Special programs should be engaged
When towing, the automatic vehicle height pro-actively - before starting to drive in
rise associated with using the system in low particular conditions. They are not intended as
range will be automatically prevented by the a means of extracting a vehicle that has been
system. This will be indicated by a warning in driven into difficulties.
the main message center. However, this The system has been designed to instil
function relies on the fitting of a Land Rover confidence regarding choice of special
approved towing electrical socket. Failure to program, despite the fact that conditions
fit a Land Rover approved towing electrical associated with each program are distinctly
socket or to follow these guidelines may lead different. However, the vehicle will be very
to the vehicle being raised to off-road height capable, even when no special program is
even with a trailer attached. selected, as some sub-systems will re-act to
the conditions where possible. In case of any
When the vehicle is started, the system will uncertainties about the most appropriate
normally start in its General program. Using the special program selection, it will be best to
correct special program, will provide benefits in leave the system in Terrain Response General
how the vehicle can be driven over different program until terrain conditions become more
surfaces or terrains. It is recommended that a distinct and a program choice can be made with
special program be engaged, whenever driving more confidence.
conditions could become difficult.
The system is of particular use when driving
Depending on the terrain, it may be beneficial off-road, but, even here, it should be used
for the transmission to change gear under pro-actively and not be used as a means of
different speed and load conditions. Each retrieving control.
special program will provide the most
If a Terrain Response special program has been
appropriate gear-shift points for the terrain,
selected, then the transmission can be left in D.
including the most appropriate gear to set off in
If descending a slippery slope, CommandShift
(i.e., second, HIGH range, or third, LOW range,
1 or 2 should be considered.
in Grass-Gravel-Snow or first, low range, when
in Rock Crawl).

192
R

Terrain Response
Driver over-ride options

WARNING
This height increase will start regardless of
whether the vehicle is moving or not.

All systems will be set to optimum parameters


for the terrain conditions reflected in the choice
of control program. Two of the systems
controlled by Terrain Response:
• Air Suspension
• Hill Descent Control
may also be operated independently by the
driver.
In some special programs, the Terrain
Response system will switch on HDC and in low
range the system will automatically move the
suspension to off-road height.
Both the HDC and suspension height automatic
selections can be cancelled by the driver at any
time. Conversely, if HDC or a specific
suspension height has not been automatically
selected by the system, the driver can always
choose to operate it as normal at any time.
Whether the HDC or ride height options are
being brought in automatically by the system,
or manually by the driver, the changes of state
will be confirmed through the main message
center and by the individual system information
indicators. Use of the system in the special
programs, particularly in low range, may
prompt some driving advice and warnings as
well as additional information to be displayed
on the main message center.
Note: Transmission gear selection can be
overridden by using the CommandShift
function on the gearbox to lock the vehicle in a
particular gear.

193
L

Terrain Response
Operation

LAN0280G

If the starter switch is turned off when any


special progam is selected, then the system will
LAN0279G remember for approximately six hours which
program was selected, and return to that
A rotary knob just behind the gear lever is program once the starter switch is turned back
rotated to select the required special program. on.
When the selector reaches either end of the
selection range, it can be turned further, but The system indicates, via the message center,
doing so has no effect. that the previously selected special program is
still selected. After more than six hours, the
In addition to the Terrain Response General system will automatically revert back to the
program, four special programs are available: General program (Special programs off).
• Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice)
• Mud/ruts
• Sand
• Rock Crawl
When the starter switch is turned on, the
indicators around the rotary knob are
illuminated, with the active program highlighted
in amber. The brightness of the indicator’s
night illumination is controlled as part of the
instrument’s illumination control; the
brightness of the amber lighting is high or low
depending on the use of the vehicle’s
headlamps.
If a Special Program is active, the Special
Program indicator will also be displayed on the
instrument pack main message center.

194
R

Terrain Response
Terrain Response General Grass-Gravel-Snow
When the Terrain Response Use this special program for
special programs are off, the surfaces where the underlying
system will be in its General base is fairly firm but a coating of
program. This will be indicated by a message in other material gives a tendency to slip. The
the main message center and program coating can be water, slime, grass, snow or
indicator illumination on the rotary knob. loose gravel, shale or pebbles, or even a thin
Vehicle systems will adapt to the prevailing coating of sand. This program should also be
terrain conditions and select control settings selected in icy conditions.
based on the conditions sensed. In this Special program the Terrain Response
This program setting is compatible with all on- systems will select settings to give the best
and off-road terrain conditions. Normal traction, handling and driveability for
conditions in which it is not necessary to select predominantly slippery conditions. Hill Descent
a special program include driving on surfaces Control will be engaged automatically in low
that closely match a solid road surface. Dry range, but can be manually de-selected.
cobbles, Tarmac or even wooden planks are all See HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC), 181.
included in the scope which consists of hard In slippery conditions it is often beneficial to
supportive surfaces with no loose coating of start off in a higher gear than usual, for
water, dust or similar material. example, CommandShift 2 in HIGH range or
It is recommended that a special program be CommandShift 3 in LOW range.
de-selected once the specific conditions for its For use of the vehicle with snow chains fitted,
use no longer prevail. This is done by turning see SNOW CHAINS, 238.
the rotary knob back to the General program
Note: When in deep snow, if the vehicle is
position.
struggling for forward traction or is stuck, then
When a special program is de-selected, all switching off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
vehicle systems will be returned to their normal may be an advantage. If DSC is switched off,
control settings. The one exception is HDC, then it must be switched back on as soon as the
which will remain active if it was manually difficulty is overcome.
selected previously. Also, as a precaution, the
vehicle will change from raised to normal
suspension height only when moving.

195
L

Terrain Response
Mud-Ruts Rock Crawl
Use this special program when Caution: Selection of a wholly inappropriate
traversing ground that is not only special program for the prevailing terrain
muddy or deeply rutted but conditions will not endanger the driver or
possibly soft and uneven to the point of immediately damage the vehicle. However, if
demanding maximum ground clearance. This continued, such an action will impair the
unevenness can also be brought about by vehicle’s response to those conditions and
sizeable wooden debris in the form of roots, will reduce the durability of the suspension
brushwood, small logs, etc. and drive systems.
This acts like the previous special program, Use this special program to cross
except that it selects settings for the individual wet or dry, solid, unyielding
vehicle systems that optimise traction and ground, such as clusters of
driveability for muddy/rutted driving boulders, which demands high levels of
conditions, with driver over-ride options as road-wheel displacement and careful vehicle
before. The Mud-Ruts special program is control. This program would also be used for
available in HIGH and LOW range, but LOW crossing river beds strewn with large rock
range is recommended. features submerged below water.
It is anticipated that this program will usually be Unlike the other special programs, Rock Crawl
used in LOW range. If not, the driver will be is only selectable in LOW range. If selection is
prompted to consider selecting LOW range. If attempted in HIGH range, the special program
the Mud-Ruts special program and LOW range selection will NOT be accepted and the driver
are selected together, the vehicle’s suspension will be prompted to select LOW range. This
height will be raised automatically. special program will utilise system control
settings to optimise the vehicle suspension and
Sand
traction control system for the conditions,
Use this special program to drive which are likely to require extreme suspension
on soft and predominantly dry, articulation and good low-speed control.
yielding sandy ground, such as dry
When a special program requires increased air
beaches, dunes and sand deserts. Also
suspension height, the system will
consider using this program for deep gravel.
automatically select it, unless it suspects that a
The Sand special program uses the control trailer is attached because an electric load is
settings and software logic best suited to seen on the trailer socket.
driving on sand, with the driver-override option
A message will be displayed on the message
as before.
center.
In instances where the sand is damp or wet and
soggy, the conditions are better addressed by
the use of mud/ruts special program.
Where the sand is extremely soft and dry and of
a depth that allows the wheels to sink well into
it, there may be additional benefit in switching
off the Dynamic Stability Control.
See Deactivating DSC operation, 179.

196
R

Terrain Response
Inappropriate special program selection MESSAGES
If attempting to select an inappropriate special Messages relating to the Terrain Response
program - such as choosing Rock Crawl while system are displayed on the instrument pack
in HIGH range - the symbol of that program will main message center.
flash amber, an audio warning will sound, and
For an explanation of those messages, see
the instrument pack message center will advise
MAIN MESSAGE CENTER, 88.
that the chosen special program is unavailable
and will suggest corrective action to be taken.
If, after 60 seconds, the requirements have not
been met, the warnings will cease and the
message center will show which program
remains active.
Should the system become partly inoperable
for any reason, it may not be possible to select
certain special programs and a warning will be
given when selection of an affected program is
attempted. If the system should become totally
inoperable, all of the control program symbols
will be switched off and the message center will
display a text message.
The air suspension system provides an
automatic levelling function (see AIR
SUSPENSION, 184). In circumstances where
the system is used in LOW range, it is most
likely that mobility and vehicle composure
would benefit from increased ground clearance.

197
L

Towing
Towing

LAN0282G

TOWING Levelling the combination


To ensure optimum stability, it is essential that
WARNING the trailer adopts a level aspect. In other words,
To preserve the vehicle’s handling and the trailer must be level with the ground, with
stability, only fit towing accessories that have the towing hitch and trailer drawbar set at the
been designed and approved by Land Rover. same height (note the illustration above).
DO NOT use lashing eyes or vehicle recovery This is particularly important when towing twin
towing eyes to tow a trailer. Use of the towing axle trailers!
eyes for purposes other than their designed
• The trailer should be level with the ground
intention could result in damage or injury.
when loaded.
Caution: An equalising or other form of weight • The height of the drawbar hitch point
distributing hitch should NOT be used with should be set so that the trailer is level
your vehicle. when connected to the loaded vehicle.
The torque ranges of Land Rover engines allow Points to remember:
maximum-weight loads to be pulled smoothly • When calculating the laden weight of the
from standstill and reduce gear changing on trailer, remember to include the weight of
hills or rough terrain. the trailer PLUS the load.
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure that the • The recommended trailer tongue weight
towing vehicle and trailer are loaded and level plus the combined weight of the vehicle's
so that the combination is stable when in load-carrying area and rear seat
motion. When preparing your vehicle for passengers must never exceed the
towing, pay attention to any instructions specified maximum rear axle load. See
provided by the trailer manufacturer as well as TOWING WEIGHTS, 291.
to the information that follows.
• Before levelling the combination, ensure
that:
All doors are closed.
The engine is running.
On-road ride height is selected.
This ensures that the towing hitch is at the
correct height.

198
R

Towing
• Where the load can be divided between Vehicle weights
trailer and tow vehicle, loading more
weight into the vehicle will generally WARNING
improve the stability of the combination. In the interest of safety, the gross vehicle
weight, maximum rear axle weight,
• Towing regulations vary from country to
maximum trailer weight and tow hitch load
country. Always ensure national
(tongue weight) must not be exceeded.
regulations governing towing weights and
Exceeding allowable vehicle and axle loads
speed limits are observed (refer to the
will increase the risk of tire and suspension
relevant national motoring organisation for
failure, increase vehicle brake stopping
information). The vehicle’s maximum
distance and adversely affect vehicle
permissible towed weight refers to its
handling and stability. This may result in a
design limitations and NOT to any specific
crash or vehicle roll-over.
territorial restriction. See TOWING
WEIGHTS, 291.
When loading a vehicle to its maximum weight
Note: When towing do not exceed 100 km/h (gross vehicle weight), ensure that axle loading
(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) when the does not exceed the permitted maximum
compact/temporary spare wheel is in use. See values. It is the driver’s responsibility to limit
WHEELS AND TIRES, 290. the vehicle load in such a way that neither the
Gear range selection maximum axle loads nor the gross vehicle
weight are exceeded.
To avoid overheating the gearbox, it is not
advisable to tow heavy trailer loads at speeds of Tongue weight
less than 32 km/h (21 mph) using the transfer
gearbox in HIGH range. Select LOW range WARNING
instead. The tongue weight plus the combined weight
of the vehicle's load carrying area and rear
seat passengers must never exceed the
specified maximum rear axle load. See
TOWING WEIGHTS, 291.

Trailer socket
The trailer socket is located alongside the rear
towing eye and behind the rear bumper cover.
See Removing the rear panel, 207.
The vehicle’s electrical system is configured to
support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted will comply with legal
requirements for the specific territory.
Caution: PDC is automatically switched off at
the rear when a trailer is attached to the
vehicle.

199
L

Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS


Tongue weight If the vehicle is loaded to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the tongue weight
is limited to 150 kg (330 lb.). If a greater tongue weight is necessary (up to
250 kg (550 lb.) maximum), vehicle load should be reduced to ensure the
GVW and rear axle weights are not exceeded. See VEHICLE WEIGHTS, 291,
for further information.
Breakaway cable A breakaway cable or secondary coupling MUST be attached. If the
or secondary trailer/caravan is fitted with brakes, it is usual for an attached breakaway cable
coupling to operate the brakes in the event of the coupling becoming detached. See
your trailer manufacturer’s literature. If your trailer does not have a breakaway
cable, a secondary coupling must be attached. Use a suitable point on the
towing bracket to securely attach the coupling. It is not advisable to loop
cables or couplings around the neck of the tow ball as they could slide off.

Caution: For all of the towing conditions


described, it is important that the following
points are observed:
• All loads in the vehicle should be
distributed as far forward as possible.
• The maximum Gross Vehicle Weight must
not be exceeded. See VEHICLE WEIGHTS,
291.
• The maximum individual axle weights
must not be exceeded. See VEHICLE
WEIGHTS, 291.
• Total trailer weight and tongue load can
be measured with platform scales found
at highway weighing stations, building
supply companies, etc.

200
R

Towing
TRAILER HITCH Detachable tow bar stowage
The optional trailer hitch receiver is rated as a
Class lll. When selecting a drawbar for the
receiver, the following dimensions must be
adhered to:
1. The maximum recommended drawbar
length is 229 mm (9 in.).
2. The maximum recommended drawbar rise
height is 70 mm (2.75 in.).

LAN0288N

2 The tow bar is stowed under an access hatch in


the rear loadspace floor.
LAN0302G

Note: A drawbar of 228 mm (9 in.) length with


a rise of 38 mm (1.5 in.) is recommended for
use with the Land Rover approved towing hitch.
Consult your Dealer for the most up-to-date
information.

TOW BAR
Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing
which will accept a detachable tow bar.

LAN0285G

201
L

Towing
Fitting the detachable tow bar

1 4

2 3

LAN0290N

WARNING WARNING
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken When handling the tow bar, hold the bottom of
when handling it. the component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.

202
R

Towing
1. Remove the protective cover from the tow
bar mounting.
Note: The protective cover should be
stowed in the tow bar stowage area, while
the tow bar is installed.
2. The tow bar can only be installed when the
green locking lever is in the unlocked
position.
3. Insert the tow bar into the mounting and
push firmly upwards until the tow bar locks
into position.
4. The red marker should be completely
covered by the green locking lever.
5. A lock is provided to prevent theft from the
vehicle. Turn the key counter-clockwise to
lock the tow bar. Remove the key and store
in a safe place.
The tow bar must be locked in position before
towing. The tow bar can only be locked if it is
installed correctly into the tow bar mounting.
It is advised that the tow bar be removed and
stored within the vehicle stowage when not in
use.

203
L

Towing
Removing the tow bar

LAN0292N

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to


WARNING
unlock the tow bar.
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
when handling it. 2. To remove the tow bar, pull the handle
outwards and rotate the handle counter
clockwise until a click is heard. The marker
on the handle should show red.
3. Carefully lower the tow bar and place it in
its stowage area and fully secure it.
4. Replace the protective towing cover in the
tow bar mounting. Press the bottom of the
cover to fix it in position.

204
R

Towing Eyes
Towing Eyes

TOWING EYES Removing the front panel

WARNING
The towing eyes at the front and rear of the
vehicle are designed for on-road vehicle
recovery purposes only and must NOT be used
to tow a trailer or caravan.
Use of the towing eyes for purposes other than
their designed intention could result in
damage or injury.

Front towing eye


A front towing eye, set behind a removable
panel in the lower front bumper, is provided at
the front of the vehicle for on-road recovery.
Before driving off-road, remove the panel from
the lower front bumper, as a precaution against
accidental loss.

LAN0294G

Rotate each of the fasteners through a quarter


turn with a coin (or something similar) to
loosen the panel. Rotate the lower edge
forwards then pull the panel to release the four
top edge hooks from their locating holes.

205
L

Towing Eyes
Refitting the front panel Rear towing eye

LAN0299G

The towing eye provided at the rear of the


vehicle can be used for towing your vehicle or
towing another vehicle in recovery situations.
LAN0295G

Offer up the panel to the bumper and ensure


that the four hooks on the top edge engage with
the holes in the bumper. Rotate the lower edge
backwards ensuring that the lower edge is
located in the bumper channel.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
through a quarter turn.

206
R

Towing Eyes
Removing the rear panel Refitting the rear panel

LAN0298G

Offer up the cover and ensure that the four


hooks on the top edge engage with the holes in
the bumper.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
LAN0297G
through a quarter turn.
Rotate each of the fasteners through a quarter
turn with a coin (or something similar) to
release the lower edge. The cover can then be
rotated to release the hooks at the top.

207
L

Towing the Vehicle


TOWING FOR RECOVERY Caution: If the following conditions are met,
Towing the Vehicle

the vehicle can be towed for a maximum


Towing the vehicle on four wheels distance of only 50 km (30 miles) at a
WARNING maximum speed of 50 km/h (30 mph). If the
stated distance or speed is exceeded,
ALWAYS adhere to the following procedure
damage to the transmission may occur.
when towing the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in unintended vehicle movement Note: Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel
or unanticipated vehicle conditions. drive and is fitted with a steering lock. The
following procedure must be carried out
When preparing to tow the vehicle, ensure
carefully to prevent damage to the vehicle.
that the parkbrake is applied, then select
neutral on the transmission. Leaving the starter switch in position I or II for
extended periods may drain the vehicle battery.
DO NOT remove the starter key or turn the
starter switch to position 0 while the vehicle 1. Secure the towing attachment from the
is in motion, as this will lock the steering. recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.
See TOWING EYES, 205.
Without the engine running, the brake servo
and power steering pump cannot provide 2. With the parkbrake applied, insert the
assistance; greater effort will therefore be starter key and turn it to position II.
required to operate the brake pedal and turn 3. Apply the foot brake and place the auto
the steering wheel. Longer stopping selector lever into N (Neutral).
distances will also be experienced. 4. Turn the starter switch to position l. Do not
turn the starter switch to position 0.
Caution: Under no circumstances can the
vehicle be towed with only two wheels in 5. If required, the starter switch may be
contact with the ground. turned to position II, to operate the brake
lamps and direction/turn indicators.
6. Release the parkbrake before towing the
vehicle.
Caution: The vehicle must not be towed under
the following circumstances:
• If the gearbox cannot be set in neutral.
• If the rear electronic differential has
failed in the locked position.

208
R

Towing the Vehicle


After towing on four wheels
After towing, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parkbrake.
2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
apply the foot brake.
3. Place the auto selector lever into P (Park).
4. Turn the starter switch to position 0.
5. Remove the towing attachment and replace
the panel in the front bumper.
Recovery on a trailer
Caution: Once the vehicle is loaded onto the
trailer and if the vehicle electronics are
operational, the Air Suspension must be set
to Access height. This should be done LAN0300G
BEFORE securing the vehicle to the trailer.
See AIR SUSPENSION, 184. Front lashing eyes
Recovery by trailer is the recommended
method. Most vehicle recovery specialists will
load the vehicle onto a trailer, or have a
combined wheel lift and towing dolly
arrangement to lift it clear of the ground.
Lashing eyes
Pairs of lashing eyes for insertion of
appropriate hooks are fixed to the underside of
the vehicle. DO NOT secure lashing hooks to
any other part of the vehicle.
Note: The front and rear lashing eyes are for
lashing only and must NOT be used for towing.

LAN0301G

Rear lashing eyes

209
L

Load Carrying
Load Carrying

ROOF RACKS
WARNING
The MAXIMUM load for approved roof rack
systems is 75 kg (165 lb.). This weight
includes the mass of the roof rack system.
A loaded roof rack can reduce the stability of
the vehicle, particularly when cornering and
encountering cross winds.
Check to ensure that the roof rack and load are
secure after 50 km (30 miles) of any journey.
Driving off-road with a loaded roof rack is not
recommended. If it is necessary to stow
luggage on the roof rack while driving
off-road, all loads must be removed before
traversing side slopes.

A range of roof rack systems are available as


Land Rover approved accessories. For further
information about roof rack systems approved
for use with the vehicle and advice as to which
system would suit your requirements best,
please consult your Land Rover Dealer.
Always observe the following precautions:
• Only fit roof racks that have been designed
for the vehicle. If in doubt, consult your
Land Rover Dealer.
• All loads should be evenly distributed, side
to side, with any weight bias towards the
front of the roof rack system.
• Ensure all loads are secured within the
periphery of the roof rack system.

210
R

Front Lighting Systems


Front Lighting Systems

HEADLAMPS Bi-Xenon headlamps


Bi-Xenon headlamps use a Xenon bulb for both
WARNING high beam and low beam whilst a halogen bulb
Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at a high is used for high beam fill-in. A shutter, operated
temperature. If they have recently been in by a solenoid, changes the direction of the
use, allow sufficient time for them to cool Xenon lamp beam to give either low or high
down before touching them. beam.
Used Xenon lamp units contain Mercury, The operational life of a Bi-Xenon lamp is
which is hazardous and can be injurious to significantly longer than that of a conventional
health. or halogen bulb.
A very high voltage is required to ignite the Seek advice about the proper disposal of
gas and metal vapour used to power Xenon Bi-Xenon lamp units, from a Land Rover
lamps. Contact with this voltage could cause Dealer.
very serious injury.
Replacement or maintenance of Xenon lamps
should be carried out only by qualified
personnel.

There are two types of headlamp systems:


• Bi-xenon high/low beam main lamps with
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside.
• An Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS).

211
L

Front Lighting Systems


Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) The AFS advantage
AFS is a new lighting system designed to give 1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not
improved visibility. fitted with AFS.
The headlamp units can swivel left or right, to 2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
improve light spread on bends in the road and with AFS.
they operate throughout the vehicle speed
range. They also react in the vertical plane to
the vehicle’s braking or acceleration to 1
maximise headlamp performance.
These units operate when the engine is running
and the lamps master switch is in position 3.
They will also operate with the lamps master
switch in position 4 (Auto), if the ambient light
has fallen below a preset level.
The system takes inputs from the vehicle’s road
speed and steering angle to determine the
amount of horizontal swivel. The amount of
swivel is highest at low manoeuvering speeds
and movement reduces as speed increases.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit’s swivelling 2
capability is disabled.
When the engine is started, the headlamps can
be seen to swivel as they go through a
self-calibration for a few seconds.

LAN0303G

212
R

Maintenance
Maintenance

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE OWNER MAINTENANCE


Regular systematic maintenance is essential to Caution: Any significant or sudden drop in
ensure the continued reliability and efficiency of fluid levels, or uneven tire wear, should be
your vehicle. reported to a Land Rover Dealer without
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and delay.
you must ensure that owner maintenance In addition to the routine maintenance, a
operations, oil services, inspections and brake number of simple checks must be carried out
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when more frequently. Advice is given on the pages
required and according to the manufacturer's that follow.
recommendations.
Daily checks
The routine maintenance requirements for the
vehicle are shown in the Passport to Service • Operation of lamps, horn, direction/turn
book. Most of this necessary workshop indicators, wipers, washers and warning
maintenance requires specialised knowledge indicators.
and equipment, and should preferably be • Operation of seat belts and brakes.
entrusted to a Land Rover Dealer. • Look for fluid deposits underneath the
Passport to Service vehicle that might indicate a leak.
The Passport to Service book includes a Weekly checks
Service Record section, which enables a record • Engine oil level.
to be kept of all the servicing and inspections
Note: The engine oil level should be
that are carried out on the vehicle. This section
checked more frequently if the vehicle is
of the book also provides a facility for the Land
driven for prolonged periods at high
Rover Dealer to record brake fluid changes.
speeds.
Ensure your Land Rover Dealer signs and
• Brake fluid level.
stamps the book after each service and
inspection. • Power steering fluid level.
• Dynamic Response fluid level.
• Windshield washer fluid level.
• Tire pressures and condition.
• Operate air conditioning.
All fluid specifications and capacities are shown
in LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 287.

213
L

Maintenance
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE WARNING
WARNING • Keep clear of all fans when working in the
engine compartment.
Under no circumstances should any part of
the fuel system be dismantled or replaced by • Keep your hands and clothing away from
anyone other than a suitably qualified motor drive belts and pulleys.
vehicle technician. Failure to comply with this • If the vehicle has been driven recently,
instruction may result in fuel spillage with a DO NOT touch exhaust and cooling
consequent serious risk of fire. system components until the engine has
• DO NOT work beneath the vehicle with the cooled.
wheel changing jack as the only means of • DO NOT TOUCH electrical leads or
support. components while the engine is running,
• Ensure sparks and open flames are kept or with the starter switch turned on.
away from the engine compartment.
• Wear protective clothing, including, Poisonous fluids
where practicable, gloves made from an Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
impervious material. and should not be consumed or brought into
• Remove metal wrist bands and jewellery contact with the skin. These include; battery
before working in the engine acid, antifreeze, brake and power steering fluid,
compartment. gasoline, engine oil and windshield washer
additives.
• DO NOT allow tools or metal parts of the
vehicle to make contact with the battery For your own safety, ALWAYS read and obey all
leads or terminals. instructions printed on labels and containers.
• NEVER leave the engine running in an Used engine oil
unventilated area - exhaust gases are Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
poisonous and extremely dangerous. serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and
cancer of the skin. ALWAYS wash thoroughly
after contact.
It is illegal to pollute drains, water
courses or soil. Use authorised waste
disposal sites to dispose of used oil
and toxic chemicals.

214
R

Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL DRIVING IN ARDUOUS CONDITIONS
Your vehicle is fitted with various items of When a vehicle is operated in extremely
emission and evaporative control equipment arduous conditions, more frequent attention
designed to meet specific territorial must be paid to servicing requirements.
requirements. You should be aware that For example: if your vehicle experiences deep
unauthorised replacement, modification or wading conditions, even DAILY servicing could
tampering with this equipment by an owner or be necessary to ensure the continued safe and
repair shop may be unlawful and subject to reliable operation of the vehicle.
legal penalties.
Arduous driving conditions include:
In addition, engine settings must not be
• Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
tampered with. These have been established to
ensure that the vehicle complies with stringent • Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
exhaust emission regulations. Incorrect engine and/or wading.
settings may adversely affect exhaust • Driving in extremely hot conditions.
emissions, engine performance and fuel • Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous
consumption, as well as causing high conditions.
temperatures, which will result in damage to
the catalytic converter and the vehicle. Contact a Land Rover Dealer for advice.

ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS


(rolling roads)
Because the vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brakes and permanent four-wheel drive, it is
essential that any dynamometer testing is
carried out ONLY by a qualified person familiar
with the dynamometer testing and safety
procedures and ONLY on a four-wheel drive
dynamometer. Contact your Land Rover Dealer
for further information.

215
L

Hood Opening
Hood Opening

HOOD OPENING Closing the hood

WARNING
DO NOT drive with the hood retained by the
safety catch alone.

Lower the hood until the safety catch engages,


then using both hands, press the hood down
until the catches click.
After closing the hood, check that the lock is
fully engaged by attempting to lift the front edge
of the hood. This should be free from all
movement.

LAN0305G

1. From inside the vehicle on the left hand


side, pull the hood release handle (see
upper inset).
2. Lift the hood safety catch lever located
below the center point of the words LAND
ROVER (lower inset). While holding the
lever raise the hood.

216
R

Under-hood Covers
Under-hood Covers

UNDER-HOOD COVERS Fitting


Caution: Ensure that no pipes, cables, or
Removal
other items have been trapped between the
cover and casing.
Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel. Once the
front edge of the cover is aligned with the front
edge of the casing, press the front of the cover
down until the two tabs click into place.

LAN0306G

Press the two forward tabs and lift the front


edge of the cover. Once the front edge of the
cover is free, slide the cover towards the front
of the vehicle.

217
L

Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment

FLUID CHECKS
WARNING
While working in the engine compartment,
ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 214.

LAN0307G

Typical Engine Compartment

1. Engine oil filler (Black cap) 2. Engine oil dipstick (Yellow)

LAN0308G LAN0309G

218
R

Engine Compartment
3. Brake fluid reservoir (White cap) 6. Washer reservoir (Blue cap)

LAN0310G LAN0313G

4. Power steering reservoir (Yellow cap) 7. Dynamic Response reservoir (Yellow cap)

LAN0311G LAN0314G

5. Cooling system reservoir (Black cap)

LAN0312G

219
L

Engine Oil
Engine Oil

CHECK AND TOP-UP Checking oil level


The oil consumption of your engine is 1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
influenced by many factors. New engines reach clean with a lint free cloth.
the normal value only after 5000 km 2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
(3000 miles). Under high loads your engine will again to check the level, which should
also consume more oil. NEVER be allowed to fall below the lower
Check the oil level at least every 400 km mark or hole on the dipstick.
(250 miles), when the engine is COLD and with 3. To top-up, unscrew the oil filler cap and
the vehicle resting on level ground. add oil to maintain the level between the
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level UPPER and LOWER marks or holes on the
when the engine is hot, switch off the engine dipstick.
and let the vehicle stand for five minutes to DO NOT OVERFILL! Clean up any oil
allow the oil to drain back into the sump. DO spillage incurred when topping-up.
NOT start the engine.
4. Check the oil level again.
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
• is nearer to the upper mark or hole than the
lower, add no oil.
• is nearer to the lower mark or hole than the
upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil. MAX
• is below the lower mark or hole, add one
litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level
MIN
after a further five minutes. H6372N

Oil specification
Caution: Your vehicle warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by use of
improper engine oil. Low quality or obsolete
oils DO NOT provide the protection required
by modern, high performance engines.
Failure to use an oil that meets the required
specification could cause excessive engine
wear, a build up of sludge and deposits, and
increase pollution. It could also lead to
engine failure.
It is essential to use an oil suitable for the
climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be
operated. Precise specifications are shown in
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 287. If in doubt,
contact your Land Rover Dealer.

220
R

Cooling System
Cooling System

ENGINE COOLANT Coolant check and top-up

WARNING
NEVER remove the filler cap when the engine
is hot - escaping steam or scalding water
could cause serious personal injury.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing the
pressure to escape before removing
completely.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot engine - a
fire may result.

Caution: NEVER run the engine without


coolant.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth
immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.
NEVER top-up with salt water. When LAN0319G

travelling in territories where the water


Top-up with a 50% mixture of antifreeze and
supply contains salt, always ensure you carry
water (see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 287),
a supply of fresh (rain or distilled) water.
up to the upper level indicator mark located
The coolant level in the expansion tank should above the COLD FILL RANGE text on the side of
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in the expansion tank. This should be viewed from
high mileage or arduous operating conditions). standing in front of the vehicle. Ignore any
Always check the level WHEN THE SYSTEM IS coolant visible in the top section of the tank.
COLD. Coolant expands when hot and may Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
cause the level to extend beyond the upper level completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
indicator mark. cap clicks.
If it is necessary to remove the filler cap before If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
the system has fully cooled, loosen the cap leakage or overheating and arrange for your
slowly, allowing the air pressure to escape Land Rover Dealer to examine the vehicle.
gradually.

221
L

Cooling System
ANTIFREEZE
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal if
swallowed - keep containers sealed and out
of the reach of children. If accidental
consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.

Antifreeze contains important corrosion


inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution
at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects against
frost down to -40°C (-40°F).
Coolant specification
Use ONLY a 50% mix of water and an approved
antifreeze. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
287.
In an emergency - and only if this type of
antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the cooling
system with clean water, but be aware of the
resultant reduction in frost protection. DO NOT
top-up or refill with conventional antifreeze
formulations. If in doubt consult a Land Rover
Dealer.

222
R

Brakes
Brakes

BRAKE FLUID Check and top-up

WARNING
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of children. If
accidental consumption of fluid is suspected,
seek medical attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the fluid level
below the MIN mark.
LAN0320G

WARNING Wipe the filler cap clean before removing to


Contact your Land Rover Dealer immediately prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
if brake pedal travel is unusually long or if
Disconnect the electrical lead.
there is any appreciable drop in brake fluid
level. Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and top-up the
reservoir to the MAX mark using a specified
Caution: Brake fluid will damage painted brake fluid. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
surfaces; soak up any spillage with an 287.
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the Use only new fluid from an airtight container
area with a mixture of car shampoo and (old fluid from opened containers or fluid
water. previously bled from the system will have
The fluid level may fall slightly during normal absorbed moisture, which will adversely affect
use as a result of brake pad wear but should not performance, and must NOT be used). DO NOT
be allowed to fall below the MIN mark. Any OVERFILL!
substantial drop in fluid indicates a leak in the Replace the cap and reconnect the electrical
system, in which case the vehicle must NOT be lead, ensuring the lead points to the center-line
driven and you should contact your Land Rover of the vehicle.
Dealer. Brake fluid must be completely renewed every
With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid two years regardless of distance travelled.
level at least every week (more frequently in
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
Check the level visually through the side of the
transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.

223
L

Power Steering
Power Steering

POWER STEERING FLUID Check and top-up


Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
WARNING engine switched off and the system cold, and
Power steering fluid is highly toxic - keep ensure the steering wheel is not turned after
containers sealed and out of reach of stopping the engine.
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.

Caution: Power steering fluid will damage


painted surfaces: Soak up any spillage with
an absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
LAN0321G
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if
the fluid level has dropped below the lower The level of fluid can be seen through the
mark - severe damage to the steering pump translucent body of the reservoir which has two
could result. marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
levels.
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must
be investigated by a Land Rover Dealer. If necessary, add fluid to the reservoir until the
level is between the upper and the lower marks.
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow,
DO NOT fill above the upper mark. See
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 287.
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
driven to the nearest Land Rover Dealer for
examination.

224
R

Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response

DYNAMIC RESPONSE FLUID Check and top-up


Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
WARNING engine switched off and the system cold.
Dynamic Response fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.

Caution: Dynamic Response fluid will


damage painted surfaces: Soak up any
spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately
and wash the area with a mixture of car
shampoo and water.
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if LAN0339G

the fluid level has dropped below the lower


The level of fluid can be seen through the
mark - severe damage to the Dynamic
translucent body of the reservoir which has two
Response pump could result.
marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
Caution: The Dynamic Response hydraulic levels.
system is extremely sensitive to the ingress
If more fluid is needed, first wipe the filler cap
of dirt and debris. The smallest amount can
clean to prevent dirt from entering the
cause the system to become unserviceable.
reservoir, then twist the cap a quarter turn
Care must be taken when removing and
anti-clockwise and pull to remove. Add fluid to
refitting the filler cap after topping-up.
the reservoir until the level is between the upper
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must and the lower marks. DO NOT fill above the
be investigated by a Land Rover Dealer. upper mark. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow, 287.
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
driven to the nearest Land Rover Dealer for
examination.
Driving of the vehicle to repair should not be
attempted if there is danger that the leaked fluid
will come into contact with a hot surface such
as the exhaust.

225
L

Washers
Washers

WINDSHIELD WASHER TOP-UP


WARNING
Some windshield wash products are
inflammable, particularly if high or undiluted
concentrations are exposed to sparking. DO
NOT allow windshield wash to come into
contact with open flames or sources of
ignition.

WARNING
If the vehicle is operated in temperatures
below 5oC (40oF), use washer fluid with
LAN0322G
antifreeze protection. In cold weather, failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection The windshield washer reservoir supplies both
could result in impaired windshield vision front and rear window washer jets and
and increase the risk of a vehicle crash. headlamp washer jets.
Check the reservoir level at least every week
Caution: DO NOT use an antifreeze or and top-up with windshield washer fluid.
vinegar/water solution in the washer
Operate the washer switches periodically to
reservoir - antifreeze will damage painted
check the washer jets are clear and properly
surfaces, while vinegar can damage the
directed.
windshield washer pump.
Note: Ensure an approved windshield washer
Body panels may suffer discolouration as a
fluid is used in the windshield washer reservoir
result of windshield wash spillage. Take care
to prevent freezing.
to avoid spillage, particularly if an undiluted
or high concentration is being used. If Note: State and local regulations may restrict
spillage occurs, wash the affected area the use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
immediately with water. which are commonly used as antifreeze agents
in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.

226
R

Washers
WASHER JETS Rear

Front
The windshield washer jets are set during
manufacture and should not need adjusting.
However, if adjustment is ever necessary, insert
a needle into the jet orifice and lever gently to
position each jet so that the spray is directed
towards the center of the windshield.

LAN0324G

Headlamp
The spray jets are set during manufacture and
should not need to be adjusted.

LAN0323G

Should any jet become blocked, insert a needle


or thin strand of wire into the orifice to clear the
blockage.

227
L

Wiper Blades
Wiper Blades

WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield
Only fit replacement wiper blades that are and pivot the blade assembly away from the
identical to the original specification. arm. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release
the blade assembly and slide the assembly off
Grease, silicone and gasoline-based products the end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the
impair the blade's wiping capability. Wash the arm to its stowed position.
wiper blades in warm soapy water and
periodically check their condition. To replace, position the wiper arm into the
aperture in the middle of the blade assembly
If signs of hardness or cracking in the rubber and push firmly into position until the blade
are found, or if the wipers leave streaks or clips into place.
unwiped areas of the glass during use, then the
wiper blades should be replaced. Rear
Clean the glass regularly with an approved
glass cleaner and ensure it is thoroughly
cleaned before fitting replacement wiper
blades.
Front

LAN0327G

Lift the wiper away from the rear window.


Press the tab (arrowed in inset) to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
LAN0325G
in its stowed position.
To replace, position the blade assembly onto
the inside of the wiper arm and push firmly into
position until the blade clips into place.

228
R

Battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS BATTERY CARE
Battery

There is a label on the battery, depicting a


WARNING
number of warning symbols. The warning
Batteries contain acid, which is both
symbols are as follows:
corrosive and poisonous. If spillage occurs:
• On clothing or the skin - remove any
No smoking, flames, no sparks
contaminated clothing immediately,
(Red).
LAN0579
flush the skin with large amounts of
water, and seek medical attention
urgently.
Shield eyes (Blue).
• In the eyes - flush with clean water
LAN0580
immediately for at least 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention urgently.
Keep away from children Swallowing battery acid can be fatal unless
LAN0581 (Red). immediate action is taken - seek medical
attention urgently.
Always wear eye protection when working
Explosive gas (Yellow). with batteries.
LAN0582
For your safety, remove all metal wrist bands
and jewellery before working in the engine
compartment and never allow the battery
Battery acid (Yellow).
terminals or vehicle leads to make contact
LAN0583
with tools or metal parts of the vehicle.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.

A low maintenance battery, specifically


designed for use with this vehicle, is fitted in the
engine compartment.
In hot climates, more frequent checks of the
battery electrolyte level are required. If
necessary, the battery cells can be topped up
with distilled water.
The exterior of the battery should occasionally
be wiped clean, to remove any dirt or grease.
If a new battery is to be fitted, it must be the
same type as the original. The use of
unapproved batteries is not recommended and
could invalidate the vehicle warranty.

229
L

Battery
We recommend that the battery charge is Check and replenish battery electrolyte
checked frequently if the vehicle is used mostly
for short distance trips or if it is not used for WARNING
long periods of time. Do not allow naked lights near the battery
(batteries generate hydrogen gas which is
Note: The service life of the battery is
highly flammable).
dependent on its condition of charge. It must
always be sufficiently charged for the battery to
last the optimum length of time.
Note: Do not connect any 12 volt equipment
(for example, a 12 volt lamp), directly to the
battery terminals. Use one of the accessory
sockets located within the vehicle for
connecting Land Rover approved accessories.

LAN0585G

Unscrew the six cell plugs.


Check that the electrolyte is level with the
plastic level indicator 1. If necessary, top up
with distilled water, but do not overfill.
Note: In normal climates this must be carried
out at least once a year. During hot weather or
in hot climates the electrolyte level must be
checked at least every three months.
Note: If illumination is required, use a hand
held flashlight to inspect the electrolyte level.
Refit the six cell plugs.

230
R

Battery
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY Remove the starter key and wait two minutes
for the engine management system to power
WARNING down.
Batteries generate explosive gases, contain Open the hood. See HOOD OPENING, 216.
corrosive acid and produce levels of electric
current sufficient to cause serious injury. Disconnect only the negative (-) terminal of the
battery.
While charging, shield your eyes or avoid
leaning over the battery and keep the area Reconnecting the battery
around the top of the battery well ventilated. Ensure that everything requiring power from
the battery - lights, audio, etc - is switched off.
While charging, always heed the precautions: Reconnect the battery lead.
• Before charging, disconnect and remove Note: If the battery was disconnected while it
the battery from the vehicle - charging the had an insufficient charge to disarm the alarm,
battery with the cables connected may the alarm could sound on reconnecting.
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. Operating the remote control or inserting the
• Make sure the battery charger leads are key into the starter switch will disarm the alarm.
securely clamped to the battery terminals Insert the starter key and turn to position II.
before switching on the battery charger. Do
not move the leads once the charger is Operate the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to
switched on. extinguish the amber warning lamp.

• When charging is finished, switch off the Effects of battery disconnection


battery charger before disconnecting the After reconnecting the battery, a number of the
leads from the battery terminals. vehicle systems will be reset automatically.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to This may take a few minutes. Some systems
charge in a cold environment. have to detect certain conditions while the
vehicle is being driven before full operability
After charging, leave the battery for one hour
returns. This in no way affects the safe
before reconnecting to the vehicle - this will
operation of the vehicle.
allow time for explosive gases to disperse,
thereby minimising the risk of fire or explosion. Battery warning indicator
Disconnecting the battery The red warning indicator in the
instrument pack illuminates as a
If the vehicle is already locked and alarmed, you
bulb check when the starter
will first have to unlock and disarm it using the
switch is turned to position II and extinguishes
remote control.
once the engine is running. If it remains on, or
See LOCKING/UNLOCKING, 49.
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the
Note: If the battery is flat and the vehicle is battery charging system is indicated. Seek
locked and alarmed, you will first have to unlock qualified assistance urgently.
the left-hand front door using the starter key.
Insert the starter key and turn it to position II.
Engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) or fit
wheel chocks. See CHANGING A WHEEL, 258.

231
L

Battery
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY Battery disposal
Used batteries should be recycled.
WARNING However, batteries are hazardous - you
Always remove the starter key before should seek advice about disposal from
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do this a Land Rover Dealer or your Local
may cause a failure of the air bag SRS. Authority.
Do not reverse the polarity of the battery - the
electrical system may be damaged if the
battery leads are connected to the wrong
terminals.

Caution: Keep the battery upright at all times


- damage will be caused if the battery is tilted
more than 45 degrees.
Do not run the engine with the battery
disconnected; or disconnect the battery with
the engine running.
Disconnect the negative (-) cable first and then
the positive (+) cable. When reconnecting,
connect the positive cable first and then the
negative cable. Do not allow the battery
terminals to make contact with metal parts of
the vehicle.
Removal
To release the battery from the vehicle, undo
the nuts securing the battery clamping plate
and remove the clamping plate.
Replacement
Ensure that the battery is fitted the right way
round (terminal posts towards the rear of the
vehicle) and that the clamping plate is secure.
Tighten the clamping plate nuts until the
clamping plate is free from movement, but do
not over tighten.
Replacement batteries
Only fit a replacement battery of the same type
and specification as the original - other
batteries could cause a fire hazard when
connected to the vehicle’s electrical system.

232
R

Tires
Tires

TIRE CARE Tire pressures

WARNING WARNING
DEFECTIVE TIRES ARE DANGEROUS. Do not If the vehicle has been parked in strong
drive if any tire is damaged, is excessively sunlight or used in high ambient
worn, or is inflated to an incorrect pressure. temperatures, do not reduce tire pressures;
instead, move the vehicle into the shade and
If your vehicle loses traction,avoid spinning
allow the tires to cool before checking.
the tire. The forces created by rapidly
spinning a tire can cause damage to and Under-inflation causes excessive flexing and
failure of, the tire structure. If the tire does uneven wear to the tire. This can lead to
spin, never exceed the 50 km/h (30 mph) sudden tire failure.
point indicated on the speedometer. Over-inflation causes a harsh ride, uneven
Do not allow anyone to stand near to or tire wear and poor handling.
directly behind a tire that might spin. A hot tire, at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure, is dangerously
Caution: Avoid contaminating the tires with under-inflated.
vehicle fluids as they may damage the tire.
Always drive with consideration for the Correctly inflated tires will ensure that you
condition of the tires, and regularly inspect the enjoy the best combination of tire life, ride
tread and side walls for any sign of distortion comfort, fuel economy and road handling.
(bulges), cuts or wear. Under-inflated tires wear more rapidly, can
The way you drive has a great deal to do with seriously affect the vehicle's road handling
your tire mileage and safety. Cultivate good characteristics and fuel consumption, as well
driving habits for your own benefit: as increasing the risk of tire failure.
Over-inflated tires give a harsher ride, wear
• Observe posted speed limits.
unevenly and are more prone to damage.
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road. should be checked monthly when cold and
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
the curb when parking. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,

233
L

Tires
you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper All operating kPa psi
pressure. Driving on a significantly conditions
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat Full size tires Front 260 38
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also Rear 290 42
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and Compact spare 420 60
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. The following procedure should be used to
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for check and adjust the tire pressures:
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s 1. Remove the valve cap.
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
2. Firmly attach a tire pressure gauge/inflator
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to the valve.
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale. 3. Read the tire pressure from the gauge. If
required, add air to the tire.
Check the pressures (including the spare
wheel) when the tires are cold - be aware that it 4. If air is added to the tire, remove the gauge
only takes 1.5 km (1 mile) of driving to warm up from the valve and re-attach it before
the tires sufficiently to affect the tire pressures. checking that the pressure is correct.
Failure to remove and re-attach the gauge
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tires; if
from the valve could cause the gauge to
it is necessary to check the tires when they are
show an incorrect reading.
warm (after the vehicle has been driven for a
while), you should expect the pressures to have 5. If too much air is added, remove the gauge
increased by up to 30 - 40 kPa (4 - 6 psi). In this from the valve and allow air out of the tire
circumstance, Do not let air out of the tires in by pressing the center of the valve.
order to match the recommended cold tire Reconnect the gauge to the valve, and
pressures. check that the air pressure is correct. If the
pressure is still not correct, repeat this
Checking tire pressures process and re-check.
WARNING 6. Refit the valve cap.
Tire pressures should be checked regularly Note: It is an offence in certain countries to
using an accurate pressure gauge when cold. drive a vehicle with tires that are not properly
Failure to properly maintain your pressures inflated in accordance with the vehicle's proper
could increase the risk of tire failure, with use.
consequential loss of vehicle control and
Valves
personal injury.
Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly - they
prevent dirt from entering the valve. Check the
valve for leaks (listen for a tell-tale hissing)
when you check the tire pressure.

234
R

Tires
Tire wear Age degradation
Tires degrade over time due to the effects of
WARNING
ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high
Tire condition should be checked after
loads, and environmental conditions. It is
off-road use, check to make sure there are no
recommended that tires are replaced every six
cuts, bulges or exposure of the ply/cord
years, or sooner if required.
structure.
Land Rover recommends that even if unused,
the spare tire be replaced at the same time as
the four road tires.
Punctured tires

WARNING
LAN0330G Do not drive the vehicle with a punctured tire.
Tires fitted as original equipment have wear Even if the punctured tire has not deflated, it
indicators moulded into the tread pattern. is unsafe to use as the tire may deflate
When the tread has been worn down to 1.6 mm suddenly at any time.
(1/16 in.) the indicators start appearing at the
surface of the tread pattern, producing the Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless tires, which
effect of a continuous band of rubber across the may not leak if penetrated by a sharp object,
width of the tire. provided the object remains in the tire.
A tire must be replaced as soon as an indicator If, however, you feel a sudden vibration or ride
band becomes visible or the tread depth disturbance while driving, or you suspect your
reaches the minimum permitted by legislation. tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive slowly, while avoiding
Note: If tire wear is uneven (on one side of the heavy braking or sharp steering inputs, to the
tire only) or becomes abnormally excessive, the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further
wheel alignment should be checked by your damage the flat tire, but your safety is more
Land Rover Dealer. important.
Tread depth must be checked regularly (at Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire
every maintenance service, or more is under inflated or damaged, remove the tire
frequently). Always replace a tire before the and wheel and replace it with the spare wheel.
tread reaches a remaining depth of 1.6 mm If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle
(1/16 in.). Do not drive with tires worn to this recovered to a tire repair center, or a Land
limit; the safety of the vehicle and occupants Rover Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
will be adversely affected.
A puncture will eventually cause the tire to lose
pressure, which is why frequent checking of tire
pressures is important. Punctured or damaged
tires must be permanently repaired or replaced
as soon as possible.

235
L

Tires
Replacement tires High performance wheel and tire
combinations
WARNING
Caution: This vehicle may be fitted with a high
Always use the same make and type of
performance wheel and low aspect tire
radial-ply tires front and rear. Do not use
combination designed to give enhanced dry
cross-ply tires, or interchange tires from front
road performance with consideration for
to rear.
aquaplaning resistance.
Your vehicle is fitted with road wheels that
Caution: Low profile, high speed rated tires
will not accept inner tubes. Do not fit a tubed
have a softer tread compound. If driven
tire.
aggressively they may suffer increased tread
Do not replace wheels with any type other wear and a shorter life than can be expected
than genuine Land Rover parts. Wheels and from other tire types.
tires are designed for both off-road and
Caution: This wheel and tire combination is
on-road use and have a very important
susceptible to damage if driven off road. This
influence on vehicle handling. Alternative
combination has less performance in snow or
wheels which do not meet original equipment
ice conditions than M and S tires. High
specifications should not be fitted.
performance tires must be replaced with
When using tires other than those winter tires when weather conditions dictate.
recommended by Land Rover, do not exceed
the speed rating recommended by the Flat spots
manufacturer. If the vehicle is stationary for a long period
when the ambient temperature is high, the tires
Wheel rims and tires are matched to suit the may form flat spots. When the vehicle is driven
handling characteristics of the vehicle. For these flat spots will cause a vibration which will
safety, always check that replacement tires steadily disappear as the tires regain their
comply with the original specification and that original shape.
the load and speed ratings shown on the side
wall are the same as that of the original
equipment. Contact your Land Rover Dealer for
further information or assistance.
Tires of the correct size and type, but of
different make have widely varying
characteristics. It is therefore recommended
that only Land Rover approved tires are fitted to
LAN0600G
all wheels.
Ideally, tires should be replaced as sets of four, In order to minimise flat spotting, the tire
but if this is not possible, replace the tires as pressures can be increased.
axle sets. Tire pressures should be increased by 14 kPa
Always have the wheels re-balanced after (2 psi) for each 10°C (20°F) temperature
replacing tires. increase.

236
R

Tires
Long term storage Pressure compensation for ambient
Flat spotting can be minimised during long temperature changes
term storage by increasing the tire pressures to
the maximum indicated on the tire sidewall.
Note: The tire pressures should be reduced to
the correct pressure before the vehicle is
driven.
Directional tires

LAN0599G

If the ambient temperature drops, the tire


pressures will decrease, which may cause
under inflation. This should be taken into
consideration when travelling to, or through,
areas of lower temperature.
Under inflation causes the tire side wall height
to reduce, which in turn results in uneven tire
wear, and a risk of tire failure.
Tire pressures may be adjusted before setting
off on a journey to, or through, areas of low
temperature. Alternatively, the tire pressures
LAN0331G
can be adjusted when low temperature areas
are reached.
Directional tires must be fitted so that they
Note: If the tire pressures are to be adjusted in
rotate in the direction that the arrow is pointing
the lower temperature area, the vehicle should
when the vehicle is moving forward.
be left standing for at least one hour prior to
adjustment.
Tire pressures should be increased by 14 kPa
(2 psi) for each 10°C (20°F) temperature
decrease.

237
L

Tires
USING WINTER TIRES If it is necessary to fit snow chains to your
Winter tires are more suitable during extremes vehicle, ALWAYS observe the following:
of low temperatures, snow and ice and will • Front wheels: Snow chains can only be
considerably improve the vehicle’s handling fitted to the front wheels of vehicles
during these conditions. equipped with 19 x 8 inch wheels.
Winter tires must be fitted on all four wheels. Note: If your vehicle is fitted with 20 inch
wheels, it will be necessary to fit a set of
Approved winter tires 19 inch wheels before snow chains can be
19 inch wheels: used.
255/55 R19 111H Goodyear Ultra Grip
• Rear wheels: Snow chains MUST NOT be
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with 20 inch fitted to the rear wheels of the vehicle.
wheels, it will be necessary to fit a set of 19 inch
• ONLY Land Rover approved snow chains
wheels before winter tires can be fitted.
should be used. These are designed for
Winter tire pressures your vehicle and will eliminate any risk of
The cold tire inflation pressures for winter tires damage to other components. Approved
are the same as those for normal tires of the snow chains are only available from a Land
same size. Rover Dealer.
• Always adhere to the snow chain fitting and
SNOW CHAINS retensioning instructions and the speed
WARNING limitations recommended for varying road
conditions.
DO NOT fit unapproved snow chains - this
could damage tires, wheels, suspension and • ONLY fit snow chains in pairs.
brake components and could result in damage • Avoid tire damage by removing the chains
to the bodywork of the vehicle. as soon as the road is free from snow.
Snow chains are designed for use on • In some driving conditions, it may be
hard-surface roads in extreme snow beneficial to deactivate Dynamic Stability
conditions only, and are not recommended for Control (DSC) in order to maximise
off-road use. traction.
Snow chains MUST NOT be fitted to a
compact/temporary spare wheel.
NEVER exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).

238
R

Tires
TIRE MARKINGS

3 4 5 6
2 7 8
1
9

15
10
14

13 11
12

LAN0332N

Tire type, 1 Tire construction, 4


P = Passenger car (standard road wheel). R indicates that the tire is of Radial ply
T = Temporary use (spare wheel). construction.

Tire width, 2 Wheel diameter, 5


This three digit number gives the width in This two digit number is the diameter of the
millimetres of the tire from sidewall edge to wheel rim in inches.
sidewall edge. Load index, 6
Aspect ratio, 3 This two or three digit number is the tire's load
This two digit number, known as the aspect index. It is a measurement of how much weight
ratio or profile, gives the sidewall height as a each tire can support. This number is not
percentage of the tread width. So, if the tread always shown.
width is 205 mm, and the aspect ratio is 50, the
sidewall height will be 102 mm.
Speed rating, 7 used for extended periods. The ratings range
The speed rating, when stated, denotes the from 160km/h to 300 km/h (99 mph to 186
maximum speed at which the tire should be mph). These ratings are listed in the following
table.

239
L

Tires
Treadwear grade, 11
Letter Speed Rating This number indicates the tire's wear rate. The
km/h mph higher the treadwear number is, the longer it
Q 160 99 should take for the tread to wear down. A tire
rated at 400 for example, will last twice as long
R 170 106
as a tire rated at 200.
S 180 112
T 190 118 Traction grade, 12
U 200 124 This letter indicates a tire's ability to stop on
H 210 130 wet pavement. A higher graded tire should
V 240 149 allow you to stop your car on wet roads in a
W 270 168 shorter distance than a tire with a lower grade.
Y 300 186 Traction is graded from highest to lowest as AA,
A, B, and C.
U.S DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN), 8 Maximum load rating, 13
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates This number indicates the maximum load in
that the tire meets all federal standards. The kilograms and pounds that can be carried by
next two numbers or letters are the plant code the tire.
where it was manufactured, and the last four
Temperature grade, 14
numbers represent the week and year the tire
was built. For example, the numbers 3105 Heat resistance grading. The tires resistance to
means the 31st week of 2005. The other heat is grade A, B, or C, with A indicating the
numbers are marketing codes used at the greatest resistance to heat. This grading is
manufacturer's discretion. This information can provided for a correctly inflated tire, which is
be used to contact consumers if a tire defect being used within it's speed and loading limits.
requires a recall. Maximum permissible inflation pressure,15
Mud and snow, 9 The maximum inflation pressure for the tire.
M+S or M/S indicates that the tire has been This pressure should not be used for normal
designed with some capability for mud and driving.
snow.
Tire ply composition and materials, 10
The number of plies in both the tread area, and
the sidewall area, indicates how many layers of
rubber coated material make up the structure of
the tire. Information is also provided on the type
of materials used.

240
R

Tires
TIRE INFORMATION LABELS Two tire information labels are visible on the
pillar behind the driver’s door (known as the B
Tire pressure label/placard (U.S. only) pillar), giving information specific to the wheel
and tire equipment fitted to the vehicle when it
MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK
was built.
DATE : MM/YY GVWR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
GAWR FRONT: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
The top label contains information relating to
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
tire and wheel sizes and recommended
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
GAWR REAR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
pressures for all wheel and tire combinations.
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
The lower label contains the following
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJXXX RIM, AT XXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
information:
U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE • The maximum number of occupants 1,
TESTMARK1234567890
divided between the front 2 and rear 3 of
TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE the vehicle.
• The vehicle capacity weight 4, which
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION includes the weight of the driver,
SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs
passengers and cargo.
TIRE
FRONT
SIZE
XXX/XXRXX
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S
XXPSI XXXkpa MANUAL FOR
• The size of the tires 5 with which the vehicle
RTC500490

REAR XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa


ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
was originally equipped, including the
SPARE TXXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa
compact spare 6.
LAN0166N • Cold inflation pressures for the front and
rear tires 7, and compact spare tire 8.
Note: The label must not be changed, even if
different wheels are fitted at a later stage.

1 2 3

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION


SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs 4
TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S
FRONT XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa MANUAL FOR
RTC500490

XXX/XXRXX
ADDITIONAL
REAR XXPSI XXXkpa
INFORMATION
SPARE TXXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa

LAN0109N
5 6 7 8

241
L

Tires
Tire pressure label/placard (Canada only)

LANDROVER
DATE : MM/YY
GVWR/PNBV : ICES/NMB - 002
XXXXKG ( XXXXLB )
GAWR FRONT/PNBE AVANT : XXXXKG ( XXXXLB )
TIRES/ RIMS/ PRESSURE (COLD) /
PNEUS JANTES PRESSION (A FROID) /
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
TXXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
GAWR REAR/PNBE ARRIER : XXXXKG ( XXXXLB )
TIRES/ RIMS/ PRESSURE (COLD) /
PNEUS JANTES PRESSION (A FROID) /
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
XXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
TXXX/XXRXX X.XJxXX XXXKPA (XXPSI) (XXLB/PO2)
VIN : TESTVIN1234567890
TYPE : MPV/VTUM

LAN0763C

A tire information label is visible on the B pillar.


The label contains information relating to tire
and wheel sizes and recommended pressures
for all wheel and tire combinations fitted to the
vehicle.
Note: The label must not be changed, even if
different wheels are fitted at a later stage.

242
R

Tires
Steps for determining correct load limit 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
WARNING weight may not safely exceed the available
Do not exceed the vehicle capacity weight cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
(the total weight of driver, passengers and in step 4.
cargo) given.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
WARNING vehicle. Consult TOWING, 198, to
The weight of accessories must also be determine how this reduces the available
subtracted from the available cargo and cargo and luggage load capacity of your
luggage load capacity. If you are unsure of the vehicle. (Subtract the trailer tongue load
weight of any accessories fitted to your from the available cargo and luggage load
vehicle, contact your Land Rover Dealer. capacity.)
Overloading the vehicle will have an adverse The number and weight of passengers will
affect on braking and handling affect the cargo and luggage load capacity. In
characteristics, which could compromise the example above, the cargo and luggage load
your safety. Overloading a vehicle may also capacity is 650 lb. However, if fewer
cause tire damage or failure. passengers ride in the vehicle, the luggage load
Never overload your vehicle. capacity will increase. If this vehicle carries
three 150 lb. passengers, the cargo and
1. Locate the statement ‘The combined luggage load capacity will increase to 950 lb.:
weight of occupants and cargo should (3 x 150 = 450 lb., and 1400 - 450 = 950 lb.).
never exceed XXXX kg or YYYY lb.’ on your If the passengers weigh more, the cargo and
vehicle’s placard. luggage load capacity will decrease.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXXX kg or YYYY lb.
(weight given on placard).
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the ‘YYYY’ amount
equals 1400 lb., and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lb.:
(5 x 150 = 750, and
1400 - 750 = 650 lb.).

243
L

Tires
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Traction

United States Department of WARNING


Transportation/Uniform Tire Quality Grades The traction grade assigned to a tire is based
The following information relates to the tire on straight-ahead braking tests, and does not
grading system developed by the National include; acceleration, cornering,
Highway Traffic Safety Administration which hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
will grade tires by tread wear, traction and
temperature performance. The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are; AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent a
Note: Tires that have deep tread, and winter
tire’s ability to stop on a wet pavement as
tires, are exempt from these marking
measured under controlled conditions on
requirements.
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Quality grades, where applicable, can be found and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder traction performance.
and maximum section width.
For example: Temperature

WARNING
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The temperature grade for this tire is
In addition to the marking requirements, established for a tire that is properly inflated
passenger car tires must conform to Federal and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
Safety Requirements. under-inflation, or overloading, either
separately, or in combination, can cause heat
Treadwear build up and possible tire failure.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
under controlled conditions on a specified and C, representing a tires resistance to the
government test course. generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate
For example; a tire graded 150 would wear one heat, when tested under controlled conditions
and a half times as well on a government test on an indoor laboratory test wheel.
course as a tire graded 100. The relative Sustained high temperatures can cause the
performance of tires depends on the actual material of a tire to degenerate, and reduce the
conditions of their use, and may depart tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
significantly from the norm due to variations in sudden tire failure.
driving habits, service practices, and The grade C corresponds to a level of
differences in road characteristics and climate. performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test than the
minimum required by law.

244
R

Tires
TIRE GLOSSARY Production options weight
The combined weight of options installed which
psi
weigh in excess of 1.4 kg (3 lb.) more than the
Pounds per square inch, an imperial unit of standard items that they replaced and not
measure for pressure. already considered in curb or accessory
kPa weights. Items such as heavy duty brakes, high
capacity battery, special trim etc.
Kilo Pascal, a metric unit of measure for
pressure. Vehicle capacity weight
Cold tire pressure The number of seats multiplied by 68 kg (150
lb) plus the rated amount of load/luggage.
The air pressure in a tire which has been
standing in excess of three hours, or driven for Maximum loaded vehicle weight
less than one mile. This sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
Maximum inflation pressure vehicle capacity weight and production options
weight.
The maximum pressure to which the tire should
be inflated. This pressure is given on the tire Rim
side wall in lb/in2 and kPa. The metal support for a tire, or tire and tube,
Note: This pressure is the maximum allowed by upon which the tire beads are seated.
the tire manufacturer. It is not the pressure
Bead
recommended for use.
See Tire pressures, 233. The inner edge of a tire that is shaped to fit to
the rim and form an air tight seal. The bead is
Curb weight constructed of steel wires which are wrapped
The weight of a standard vehicle, including a full or reinforced by the ply cords.
tank of fuel, any optional equipment fitted and
with the correct coolant and oil levels.
Gross vehicle weight
The maximum permissible weight of a vehicle
with driver, passengers, load, luggage,
equipment and tow ball load.
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
replaced) of items available as factory installed
equipment.

245
L

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


Tire Pressure Monitoring System

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING


SYSTEM (TPMS)
1
WARNING
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
is not a substitute for manually checking tire
pressures. The TPMS only provides a low tire
pressure warning and does not re-inflate the
tires.
The TPMS cannot register damage to a tire. 2
Regularly check the condition of your tires,
especially if the vehicle is driven off-road.

Caution: When inflating tires, care should be


taken to avoid bending or damaging the TPMS
valves. Always ensure correct alignment of LAN0544G
the inflation head to the valve stem.
Wheels fitted with a TPMS can be visually
Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere identified by the external metal lock nut and
with the system. If this occurs, TIRE valve 1. All Land Rover non-TPMS wheels have
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT will a rubber valve fitted 2.
be displayed in the message center.
Note: Different types of tire may affect the TPM system operation
performance of the TPMS. Always replace tires The TPMS monitors the pressure of the tires via
in accordance with recommendations. sensors located in each wheel and a receiver
located within the vehicle. Communication
Your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS
between sensor and receiver is via Radio
which monitors pressure in each tire, including
Frequency (RF) signals.
the full-size spare tire. Temporary spare tires
are not fitted with sensors and are The tire pressure warning
consequently not monitored. comprises an amber warning
indicator (telltale) within the
Note: The TPMS only provides a low tire
instrument pack and an associated message
pressure warning and does not re-inflate the
within the message center.
tires.

246
R

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


If the telltale light illuminates, you should stop TPMS malfunction
and check your tires as soon as possible and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
inflate them to the recommended pressure. If TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
low pressure warnings occur frequently, the the system is not operating properly.
cause must be determined and rectified.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
flash for approximately one minute and then
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
remain continuously illuminated. This
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
sequence will continue upon subsequent
The TPMS also monitors the full size spare tire vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
pressure. If the pressure for the spare tire is exists. When the malfunction indicator is
incorrect, the message CHECK SPARE TIRE illuminated, the system may not be able to
PRESSURE will be displayed, accompanied by detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
illumination of the warning telltale. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
When driving through variable climatic reasons, including the installation of
conditions, the TPMS warnings may be replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
intermittent. vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
TPMS audible warnings telltale after replacing one or more tires or
A warning chime will sound whenever any of wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
the following occurs. replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
• The pressure in one or more tires is very the TPMS to continue to function properly.
low. A text message will accompany the system
• The vehicle speed increases from 0 to 60 malfunction and will display TIRE PRESSURE
km/h (0 to 38 mph) with very low pressure MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT.
in more than one tire.
Spare tire pressure
• A fault is detected in the TPMS system or in The full size spare tire should be inflated to the
a wheel sensor. highest pressure for the specified tire size,
when not in use on the vehicle.

247
L

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


Full size spare wheel and tire change If a tire needs to be changed
Should it be necessary to change a wheel and Caution: The valve stem seal, washer, nut,
tire with the spare then the system will valve core and cap should be replaced at
automatically recognise the change in wheel every tire change.
positions. The vehicle needs to be stationary for The valve stem seal, washer and nut must be
15 minutes during the wheel and tire change, replaced if the valve retention nut is
before the system is ready to detect the change loosened.
in positions. After driving above 25 km/h
(18 mph) any deflation warning will clear Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using
typically within five minutes. correct torque figures and associated profile.
Sensors can be removed from the wheel by
Temporary spare wheel and tire change unscrewing the valve retention nut.
If the temporary spare wheel is fitted, the
Damage to the vehicle may result if these
system will automatically recognise the change
precautions are not taken.
in wheel positions. After approximately ten
minutes of driving above 18 mph (25 km/h), It is recommended that you should always have
the message TIRE PRESSURE FRONT (REAR) your tires serviced by a dealer or qualified
RIGHT (LEFT) NOT MONITORED will be technician. If a TPMS is fitted, each wheel and
displayed, accompanied by illumination of the tire assembly, with the exception of a
warning telltale. temporary spare, is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor connected to the tire valve
The warning telltale will initially flash and will
stem.
subsequently revert to continuous illumination.
Extended use of the temporary spare wheel, will In order to avoid damage to the sensor, the tires
produce an additional text message TIRE must be removed and refitted to the road wheel
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT. in a specified manner. Care must be taken to
avoid contact between the bead of the tire and
This TPMS display sequence will be activated at
the sensor during removal and refitting of the
every starter switch cycle until the temporary
tire, otherwise the sensor may become
spare wheel is replaced by a fully operational
damaged and/or inoperable.
full size wheel and tire assembly.
Always replace the temporary spare wheel
before having TPMS faults investigated. The
fault may well be rectified with the fitment of a
fully operational full size running tire in lieu of
the temporary spare wheel assembly.

248
R

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


Replacement sensor fitment procedure
Sensor replacement should be carried out by a
Land Rover Dealer.
A replacement sensor must be fitted to a
running wheel in order to be recognised by the
TPMS. Recognition only occurs when the
vehicle is driven above 25 km/h (18 mph) for
approximately ten minutes.
Should the TPMS warning for any wheel not
clear, even after ensuring correct inflation and
driving for more than ten minutes above
25 km/h (18 mph), consult your Land Rover
Dealer.
Type approval numbers
The TPMS devices comply with part 15 of the
FCC rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference
2. This device must accept interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The TPMS radio frequency approval numbers
for the USA and Canada are shown below:-
USA FCC ID: KR5S120123, TX KR55WK47594.
Canada IC: 267T-S120123, 267T-5WK47594.

249
L

Cleaning and Vehicle Care


Cleaning and Vehicle Care

WASHING YOUR VEHICLE Underbody maintenance


Corrosive materials used on highways to
control snow and ice and dust can collect on
underbody parts. If these materials are not
removed, accelerated corrosion can occur. Use
a hose to regularly flush the underbody with
plain water, taking particular care to thoroughly
clean those areas where mud and other debris
can easily collect.
Similarly, after off-road driving or wading in
muddy or salt water conditions, use a hose to
wash underbody components and other
exposed parts of the vehicle.

LAN0337G
When using a hose, do not direct the jet into the
engine air intake, which is located on the
Caution: Never aim a high pressure water jet right-hand-side front fender (viewed from
directly at the engine air intake, heater air driver’s position), or the heater air intake ducts,
intakes, body and sunroof seals, or at any or through the wheel trim apertures onto the
components that might easily be damaged. brake components, or at the door, window or
Do not use a high pressure washer in the sunroof seals, where water pressure could
engine bay area. Damage to components penetrate the seals.
could occur. If damage or corrosion to the underbody area is
Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a detected, please have the vehicle checked by a
hose before washing the vehicle. Land Rover Dealer at the earliest opportunity.
Wash the vehicle frequently using a sponge and Cleaning after off-road driving
generous quantities of cold or lukewarm water
Caution: After driving off-road, ensure that
containing a car shampoo. Rinse and dry off
areas around air intakes and the front grille
with a chamois leather.
are clean and clear of debris. Failure to do so
• Do not use hot water! may cause the engine to overheat.
• Do not use detergent soap products or Ensure that the vehicle and underside is
washing-up liquid! cleaned soon after off-road driving, taking
• In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle in particular care to clean areas where mud and
direct sunlight. debris has compacted.
Removing tar spots Use a low pressure hose to flush water through
the lower grille area, to clean the cooling
Use methylated spirits to remove tar spots and
system components.
stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Then
wash immediately with soapy water to remove
all traces of spirit.

250
R

Cleaning and Vehicle Care


Body protection CLEANING THE INTERIOR
After washing, inspect the paintwork for Caution: Read individual product warnings
damage. Any stone chips, fractures or deep before using any car cleaning or washing
scratches in the bodywork should be repaired products.
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and
can develop into major repair expense. Some Plastic materials
exterior panels of your vehicle are made of Clean plastic-faced or cloth-covered surfaces
aluminium which will not corrode in the same with warm water and a non-detergent soap and
manner as steel. However, any damage should wipe with a clean cloth.
still receive prompt attention. Minor chips and Note: DO NOT polish instrument panel
scratches can be repaired with touch-up components - for safety, these should remain
materials available from your Land Rover non-reflective.
Dealer. Larger areas of damage need to be
corrected to professional standards Leather
immediately. Land Rover recommends that leather is cleaned
and protected at least every six months.
Polishing
Leather cleaning kit, BAC500490, or equivalent,
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an
is recommended and endorsed by Land Rover
approved polish containing the following
for this purpose. Use in accordance with the
properties:
instructions printed on the label.
• Very mild abrasives to remove surface
Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to
contamination without removing or
dye-transfer which can cause unsightly
damaging the paint.
discoloration of lighter colored leathers.
• Filling compounds that will fill scratches Affected areas should be cleaned and
and reduce their visibility. re-protected as soon as possible.
• Wax to provide a protective coating DO NOT use chemical or abrasive materials to
between the paint and the elements. clean leather. Gasoline, methylated spirits,
Note: Contact your Land Rover Dealer to obtain alcohol, detergents, washing-up liquid,
approved materials. household cleaners, furniture polishes/creams
or solvents should never be used on leather.
Glass and mirrors
While these products may give initially
Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid impressive results, their use will lead to rapid
damaging the heating and antenna elements. deterioration of the leather and will invalidate
DO NOT scrape the glass or use an abrasive the warranty.
cleaning fluid.
Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to
damage. Wash with soapy water. DO NOT use
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal
scrapers to remove ice.

251
L

Cleaning and Vehicle Care


Carpet and fabrics Air bag module covers
Clean with diluted nylon upholstery cleaner -
WARNING
test on a concealed area first.
To prevent air bag SRS damage, the steering
Instrument pack, clock and audio wheel center pad, side air bags and area of
Clean with a dry cloth only! DO NOT use the instrument panel containing the
cleaning fluids or sprays. passenger air bag should ONLY be cleaned
sparingly with a damp cloth and upholstery
Seat belts cleaner.
Extend the belts, then use warm water and a DO NOT allow these areas to be flooded with
non-detergent soap to clean. DO NOT use liquid, and DO NOT use gasoline, detergent,
cleaning solvents. Allow the belts to dry cleaning solvents, furniture cream or
naturally, and do not retract them or use the polishes.
vehicle until they are completely dry.

252
R

Identification Numbers
Identification Numbers

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Federal VIN plate


NUMBER (VIN)
If you need to communicate with a Land Rover
Dealer, you may be asked to quote the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).

MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK


DATE : MM/YY GVWR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
GAWR FRONT: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIM, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
GAWR REAR: XXXXKG (XXXXLB)
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD LAN0679G
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
XXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIMS, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD
TXXX/XXRXX TIRES, X.XJxXX RIM, AT XXXKPA (XXPSI) COLD In addition to the certification label, the Federal
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
VIN plate is mounted to the vehicle body so that
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE

TESTMARK1234567890
it is visible through the lowest part of the left
side of the windshield. The VIN is also stamped
TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE on the vehicle’s chassis.

LAN0107N

The VIN, and other information concerning the


vehicle, can be found on the certification label
affixed to the lock-face of the front left-hand
door.
Note: The information displayed on the
certification label is market-dependent and
vehicle type specification may differ from the
example.

WARNING
DO NOT exceed the gross weight or axle loads
stated on the certification label attached to
the vehicle. Exceeding allowable vehicle and
axle loads will increase the risk of fire or
suspension failure, increase vehicle brake
stopping distance, and adversely affect
vehicle handling and stability which may
result in a crash or roll-over.

253
L

Wheel Changing
Roadside Emergency

TOOL KIT Content

Stored location
1
2

3 4

6
5
7

LAN0342N

The tool kit consists of:


1. Screwdriver handle
LAN0340G 2. Screwdriver blade
3. Jack screw rotating hook
The tool tray is located under a lift-up panel set
in the loadspace floor. 4. Extension piece
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position 5. Wheel nut brace
of each of the tools as it is important to return 6. Wheel chocks
them to their correct position after use. 7. Wheel change jack
Care of the jack

WARNING
After wheel changing, always secure tools,
chocks, jack and replaced wheel in their
correct storage positions. Such objects if not
properly stowed can become flying missiles
in a crash or roll-over, potentially causing
injury or death.

Examine the jack occasionally, clean and grease


the moving parts, particularly the screw thread,
to prevent corrosion.
To avoid contamination, the jack should always
be stowed in its fully closed position.

254
R

Wheel Changing
PUNCTURED TIRES
If you have a flat tire while driving:
• Do not brake heavily.
• Gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• Hold the steering wheel firmly.
• Slowly move to a safe and suitable place at
the side of the road.
Wheel changing safety
If possible, choose a safe place to stop away
from the highway. Always ask your passengers
to get out of the vehicle and wait in a safe area
away from other traffic.Disconnect any
attached trailer or caravan.
Note: Switch on the hazard warning lamps to LAN0343G

alert other road users.


Before changing a wheel, ensure that the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position (if
possible), apply the parkbrake and select P
(Park). Raise the air suspension to off-road
height.
Turn off the starter switch, remove the key and
engage the steering lock.
Using wheel chocks

WARNING
Before raising the vehicle, it is ESSENTIAL to
chock the road wheels in two places. This is
to increase stability while the vehicle is
raised.

If possible, position the vehicle on level ground,


chocking both sides of the wheel diagonally
LAN0344G
opposite the one to be removed.
If jacking the vehicle on a slope is unavoidable, The wheel chocks are stowed in the tool kit, as
place the chocks on the downhill side of the two shown in TOOL KIT, 254.
opposite wheels.

255
L

Wheel Changing
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL
WARNING
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take care
when manoeuvering the spare wheel.

Always remove the spare wheel before jacking


up the vehicle.
Note: Before removing the spare wheel from
the vehicle, take a look at the position that the
spare wheel is stowed in, as you will need to
check that the wheel about to be removed from
the vehicle is returned to the correct storage
position.

LAN0346G

3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist


winch nut and rotate counter-clockwise to
lower the spare wheel.
Caution: The mechanism has been designed
for use with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT
use power tools on the wheel-hoist
winch.
When the wheel has reached the ground,
continue to wind the handle until the cable
is slack.
Do not attempt to turn the winch beyond
the physical stop.

LAN0345G

With the tailgate open:


1. Lift open the spare wheel mechanism
access hatch in the rear loadspace.
Remove the jack from the tool tray.
2. Tilt up the circular locking cap covering the
spare wheel storage nut. LAN0347G

256
R

Wheel Changing

LAN0348G

4. Raise the wheel as indicated. Hold the cable


and tilt the lifting lug until it can be lifted
through the hole in the wheel, as shown
above.

257
L

Wheel Changing
CHANGING A WHEEL
Positioning the jack

LAN0350G

258
R

Wheel Changing
WARNING
NEVER work beneath the vehicle with the jack
as the only means of support. The jack is
designed for wheel changing only.
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking up the vehicle.

WARNING
Always:
• Place the jack on firm, level ground.
• Position the jack from the side of the
vehicle, in line with the appropriate
jacking point.
• Raise the jack so that the pin in the head
of the jack engages with a hole in the
chassis rail at the points shown in the
illustrations.

WARNING
ALWAYS use the complete, two-piece, jack
lever throughout to minimise any chance of
accidental damage or injury.

WARNING
ONLY jack the vehicle using the jack location
points described, or damage to the vehicle
could occur.

Caution: Before positioning the jack under the


vehicle, ensure that the air suspension is set
to Off-road height.

259
L

Wheel Changing
Operating the jack Changing a wheel

WARNING
When fitting a wheel, ensure that the mating
faces of the hub and wheel are clean and free
from rust or anti-seize compound - any
accumulation of dirt or rust could cause the
wheel nuts to become loose.

Always remove the spare wheel before jacking


up the vehicle.
1. Raise the vehicle until the tire is clear of the
ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and place to one
side to prevent them from being lost.
3. Remove the road wheel.
Note: DO NOT damage the style surface of
the wheel by placing it face down on the
road.
4. On alloy wheels, use an approved anti-seize
compound (available from a Land Rover
Dealer) to treat the wheel to hub mating
surfaces. This will minimise any tendency
for adhesion between the wheel and hub.
Ensure that no compound comes into
contact with the brake components or the
LAN0351G
flat mounting surfaces of the wheel.
Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel nut If, due to an emergency situation, this
brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a turn treatment is not practicable; refit the spare
counter-clockwise. wheel for the time being, but remove and
Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack. Fit the treat the wheel at the earliest opportunity.
wheel nut brace onto the end of the cranking 5. Fit the spare wheel with the valve stem
lever. outwards and lightly tighten the wheel
Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the jack nuts, ensuring they are firmly seated. DO
cradle until it engages with the jacking point. NOT fully tighten whilst the tire is clear of
Ensure that the base of the jack is in full contact the ground. See Directional tires, 237.
with the road surface.

260
R

Wheel Changing
6. Ensure that the space under and around the Compact spare wheel
vehicle is free from obstructions then lower
the vehicle and remove the jack and wheel WARNING
chocks. The following precautions must be observed
when the compact spare wheel is in use:
7. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in an
alternating pattern until all are tightened. • DRIVE CAUTIOUSLY; the compact spare
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN by using foot wheel tire is smaller in size and higher in
pressure or extension bars on the wheel pressure than a regular tire. It will cause
nut brace, as this could overstress the a harsher ride and may provide less
wheel nuts. Check the wheel nut torque at traction on some road surfaces. If driving
the earliest opportunity. off-road on a compact spare wheel, drive
with extra caution.
Road wheel nut 140 Nm (± 10 Nm) • The compact spare wheel is for
torque to hub TEMPORARY use only. It MUST be
replaced by a normal-sized wheel and tire
8. Using a suitable blunt tool, apply light as soon as possible.
pressure to the rear of the displaced wheel • Only ONE compact spare wheel is to be
center cap and remove. Using hand used on the vehicle at any one time.
pressure only, fit the center cap into the • DO NOT drive at a speed exceeding
newly fitted wheel. Return tools, chocks, 80 km/h (50 mph).
jack and the displaced wheel to their
correct storage positions. • The tire pressure in the compact spare
wheel/tire should be as detailed in the
9. REMEMBER to change to H (HIGH) range tire pressures table. See TIRE
before driving. PRESSURES, 34.
10. Finally, check the tire pressure at the • The compact spare tire has a shorter life
earliest opportunity. See TIRE than a regular tire. Replace the tire with
PRESSURES, 34. one of the same type and specification.
Note: During jacking, the air suspension • The use of snow chains is not permitted
system may enter an automatic freeze state. on a compact spare wheel.
See Suspension freeze, 188.

261
L

Wheel Changing
Stowing the changed wheel

WARNING
DO NOT stow the wheel while the vehicle is
still raised on the jack.

WARNING
The wheel must be securely retained in its
correct position by the winch mechanism or it
could become loose.

Caution: DO NOT stow 20 inch wheel and tire


assemblies under the vehicle, as this may
result in damage to the wheel face.
1. Place the wheel under the rear of the
vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
The mechanism has been designed for use
with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT use
power tools on the wheel-hoist winch.
4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
clutches out. This is confirmed by a clear LAN0349G
physical feedback from the wheel nut brace
and an audible noise. Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not
5. Check that the wheel has returned to the to be fitted back under the vehicle, the wheel
same position as the spare wheel removed hoist should be rewound as follows.
previously. If in any doubt, unwind the Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
winch slightly and repeat the previous step. wind up the wheel hoist mechanism until it
6. Replace the circular cap over the clutches out.
wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this
cap is exposed to the same conditions as
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it
is firmly in place.
7. Place the tools back into their stowage
location.

262
R

Emergency Starting
Emergency Starting

STARTING AN ENGINE WITH A Using booster cables


DISCHARGED BATTERY Using booster cables (jump leads) from a
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a donor
WARNING vehicle, is the only approved method of starting
Always wear eye protection when working a vehicle with a discharged battery.
around batteries.
Boosting from another vehicle
During normal operation batteries emit
If a donor vehicle is to be used, both vehicles
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
should be parked with their battery locations
naked lights are kept away from the engine
adjacent to each other. Ensure that the two
compartment.
vehicles do not touch.
DO NOT attempt to start the vehicle if the
Apply the parkbrakes and ensure that the
electrolyte in the battery is suspected of being
transmission of both vehicles is set in neutral
frozen.
(P or Park).
Make sure BOTH batteries are of the same
Turn off the starter switch and ALL electrical
voltage (12 volts), and that the booster cables
equipment of BOTH vehicles.
have insulated clamps and are approved for
use with 12 volt batteries.
DO NOT disconnect the discharged battery.
DO NOT connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals, and ensure booster
cables are kept away from any moving parts
in the engine compartment.
Take care when working near rotating parts of
the engine.

WARNING
DO NOT use a 24 volt booster start system.
These produce excessive voltage and can
damage the vehicles electrical system.

Caution: DO NOT push or tow start.

263
L

Emergency Starting
Boosting procedure Always adopt the following procedure, ensuring
the cables are connected in the order shown
WARNING below:
For safety reasons:
1. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
• DO NOT connect the black cable to the the RED booster cable to the positive (+)
negative terminal of the discharged terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
battery. If in doubt, seek qualified positive (+) connection point.
assistance.
2. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
• ENSURE that each connection is securely end of the RED booster cable to the positive
made and that there is no risk of the clips (+) battery terminal.
accidentally slipping, or being pulled,
3. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
from the battery terminals. This could
the BLACK booster cable to the negative (-)
cause sparking, which can lead to a fire
terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
or explosion.
negative (-) connection point.
4. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the BLACK booster cable to a good
+ earth point (e.g. an engine mounting or
other unpainted metal surface) at least
0.5m (20 in.) from the battery and well
away from fuel and brake lines.
+ Check that the cables are clear of any moving
parts of both engines, then start the engine of
the donor vehicle and allow it to idle for a few
+
minutes.
Now start the vehicle with the discharged
battery. Once both engines are running
normally, allow them to idle for two minutes
+ before switching off the donor vehicle engine.
DO NOT switch on any electrical circuits on the
previously disabled vehicle until AFTER the
booster cables have been removed.
Disconnecting the booster cables must be an
EXACT reversal of the procedure used to
connect them.
LAN0353G

264
R

Fuses
Fuses

FUSES Checking or renewing a fuse


Fuses are simple circuit devices which protect WARNING
electrical equipment against the effects of To prevent a possible fire or damage to the
excess current. electrical system, fit Land Rover appoved
A blown fuse is indicated when the electrical replacement fuses of the same rating and
equipment it protects becomes inoperative. type or fuses of matching specification. Do
Fuses are colour coded to help identify their not replace a blown fuse with a fuse of a
amperage, as follows: higher amperage rating. Always rectify the
cause of the failure before replacing a fuse.
Blade fuse colours Seek qualified assistance if necessary.

VIOLET 3 amp Always turn the starter switch to position O and


TAN 5 amp switch off the affected electrical circuit before
BROWN 7.5 amp removing a fuse.
RED 10 amp Engine compartment fuse box
BLUE 15 amp
YELLOW 20 amp
WHITE 25 amp
GREEN 30 amp

Cartridge fuse colours (engine bay only)

BLUE 20 amp
PINK 30 amp
GREEN 40 amp
RED 50 amp
YELLOW 60 amp

Note: Owners are advised against removing or


replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on LAN0354G
the relays) and fusible links (identified as
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links). Failure of any of The engine compartment fuse box is located at
these items should be investigated by a the rear of the engine bay. To view the fuse box,
qualified technician. the under-hood cover will have to be removed.
See UNDER-HOOD COVERS, 217. The plastic
lid of the box is removed by pressing the plastic
tabs in.

265
L

Fuses
Engine compartment fuses

F1 XX XX F2

F3 XX XX F4

F5 XX XX F6

F7 XX XX F8

F9 XX XX F10

F11 XX XX F12

F13 XX XX F14

F15 XX XX F16

F17 XX XX F18

F19 XX F20

F21 XX F22

F23 XX XX F24

F25 XX XX F26

F27 XX XX F28

F29 XX XX F30
LAN0356G

Note: Fuse removal tweezers and spare blade


fuses are located in the passenger
compartment fuse box. See Passenger
compartment fuse box, 268.

266
R

Fuses
Engine compartment fuse specification
Fuse Rating Circuit protected
number (amps)
1 25 Fuel pump
2 -
3 5 Air suspension ECU
4 25 V8 Supercharged - Supercharger cooling pump
5 10 Petrol EMS (purge valve, EGR, inlet manifold tune valve),
E-Box fan, Adaptive cruise control
6 15 Petrol EMS (coils)
7 25 Hevac - front seat heat
8 25 Rear seat heat
9 15 Dynamic Response
10 15 Petrol EMS (throttle motor, MAF), cool fan
11 15 Petrol EMS (rear oxygen sensors)
12 10 Heated washer jets
13 10 Petrol EMS (ECU, VVTs and fuel pump relay control)
14 20 Petrol EMS (front oxygen sensors)
15 30 Heated windshield
16 10 Heated door mirrors
17 15 Petrol EMS (injectors)
18 30 Heated windshield
19 -
20 5 Generator
21 -
22 -
23 25 Dynamic Stability Control system
24 20 Brake boost pump
25 10 Lighting switch
26 20 Air suspension ECU
27 5 Engine control module (EMS)
28 -
29 30 Front wipers
30 10 Auto transmission ECU

Note: Fuse removal tweezers and spare blade fuses are located in the passenger compartment fuse
box. See Passenger compartment fuse box, 268.

267
L

Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse box

LAN0357G

The passenger compartment fuse box is fitted


behind the glovebox. To access the fuses, o